JP2021058451A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of imparting a new game property for enhancing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous game advantageous to a player on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition; pattern determination means capable of determining a pattern associated with a result of the determination; and setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of game states including a non-time shortening game state in which the frequency of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous game is relatively low, and a time-shortening game state in which the frequency is relatively high. The setting means can set the time-shortening game state when a specific pattern associated with non-execution of an advantageous game is determined, and can set a common time-shortening game state in any of the case where a specific pattern is determined and the case where a predetermined pattern associated with execution of an advantageous game is determined.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, as a game machine of this type, a big hit lottery (decision on whether or not to execute a special symbol) and a special symbol showing the result of the lottery are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the starting winning opening provided in the game area. Is decided, a variable display of the special symbol is executed, and a stop display of the jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a jackpot is performed, so that a special game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained is executed. What is known is known. In such a game machine, it is general that the advantage of the game profit given to the player is set to be different according to the type of the determined jackpot symbol. For example, as a game state, a non-time-saving game state in which it is relatively difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined start winning opening and a time-saving game state in which the game ball is relatively easy to enter the predetermined start winning opening are provided. A gaming machine is known in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the time-saving gaming state when a specific jackpot symbol is determined (see Patent Documents 1 and 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-107139 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-253554

However, in the game machine as described above, the game state set after the execution of the special game is associated with the type of the jackpot symbol, and the non-time saving game state is not performed through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game. Cannot be changed to the time-saving game state. Therefore, since there are large restrictions on changing to different game states, it is difficult to design game specifications with a high degree of freedom, and there arises a problem that it is not possible to provide a novel game property that can enhance the interest of the player. Was there.

Therefore, the present invention has been made under the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of imparting a novel game property that can enhance the interest of a player.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is configured as follows.

(1) The present invention is a deciding means capable of deciding whether or not to execute an advantageous game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a symbol deciding means capable of deciding a symbol associated with the result of the determination. A setting means capable of setting either a non-time-saving game state in which the frequency of determining whether or not to execute the advantageous game is relatively low, or a plurality of game states including the time-saving game state in which the frequency is relatively high. When a specific symbol associated with not executing the advantageous game is determined, the setting means can set the time-saving game state and determines the specific symbol. It is a gaming machine characterized in that a common time-saving gaming state can be set in both cases where a predetermined symbol associated with the execution of the advantageous game is determined.
Here, the predetermined conditions are, for example, that the game ball has entered the approach area (starting winning opening) provided in the game area, and that the hold memory is stored when the change of the symbol (special symbol) is completed. And so on.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a specific symbol associated with not performing an advantageous game advantageous to the player is determined, the frequency of determining whether or not to execute the advantageous game advantageous to the player is determined. Is set to a relatively high time-saving game state. Therefore, since it is possible to set the time-saving game state without determining the execution of the advantageous game and executing the advantageous game, it is possible to design a game specification with a high degree of freedom, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player. It is possible to give a novel playability.
Further, in both the case where a specific symbol is determined and the case where a predetermined symbol associated with the execution of the advantageous game is determined, the same time-saving game state is set by setting the same. The chances of setting the time-saving game state will increase, and the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of imparting novel playability that can enhance the interest of the player.

It is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is the external perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front door open. It is a front schematic view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic view of the inside of the attacker device of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the special symbol random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the time saving symbol random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the special electric accessory operation table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the game state setting table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the hit determination random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd start winning opening opening control table of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the main processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the timer interrupt processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the processing at the time of sensor detection in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the processing at the time of gate detection in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process at the time of detecting the 1st start winning opening in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process at the time of detecting the 2nd start winning opening in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the pre-determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the processing at the time of detection of a specific area in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special drawing and the time saving symbol related control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the fluctuation start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the fluctuation pattern determination processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the post-stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special game control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the small hit game control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the small hit game end processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special game end processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the control process related to a general drawing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the normal symbol variation start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the processing after the normal symbol stop in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the movable piece control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each game state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 3. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each game state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 3. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 4. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each game state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 4. It is a front schematic view of the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 5. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 5. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each game state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 5.

(External configuration of pachinko machine P)
The gaming machine according to this embodiment is a pachinko machine P that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium. Although not shown in particular, in a game hall where pachinko machines P are installed, a plurality of pachinko machines P are arranged side by side in an installation area of a game machine called an island, and a game for renting a game ball. A ball lending device is installed adjacent to each pachinko machine P. Further, each pachinko machine P is connected to a corresponding game ball lending device R.
The game ball lending device R can insert a storage medium (card) in which value information necessary for inserting bills and lending game balls is stored. Then, after inserting a bill (or inserting a card) into the game ball lending device R and performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine P, the game ball can be rented from the game ball lending device R. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 1 or 2, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment is a square frame body fixed to an island and has a hollow portion (not particularly shown) and a machine frame 1. A main body frame 2 having a hollow portion (not particularly shown), which is a quadrangular frame body that can be opened and closed by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown), and this main body frame. No. 2 is provided with a front door 3 which is attached to 2 by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown) so as to be openable and closable, and has an opening (not particularly shown) formed on the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 1, a speaker as an audio output device 10 is provided in the lower left portion of the machine frame 1. Further, a game board 11 for forming the game area 12 is housed in the hollow portion of the main body frame 2. Further, the front door 3 has a transparent plate 4 that covers the opening, an upper plate 6 and a saucer 7 that are located below the transparent plate 4 and can receive the game ball, and a game ball that is attached to the right side of the saucer 7. An operation handle 5 for performing a firing operation and a speaker as an audio output device 10 attached to each of the left and right upper sides of the transparent plate 4 are provided.

In this pachinko machine P, when the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the machine frame 1 and the front door 3 is closed, the transparent plate 4 is positioned in front of the game board 11 with a gap in between. As a result, the game board 11 located at the rear can be visually recognized through the transparent plate 4.

Further, a game ball rented by the game ball lending device R and a prize ball paid out from the pachinko machine P are guided to the upper plate 6. The upper plate 6 is capable of receiving a predetermined amount of game balls, but when the upper plate 6 is filled with the game balls, the game balls that are subsequently rented or paid out are guided to the saucer 7. It has become like. Further, although not particularly shown, the bottom surface of the saucer 7 is provided with a discharge hole for discharging the stored game ball and an opening / closing plate capable of opening and closing the discharge hole. In the normal state, the discharge hole is closed by the opening / closing plate, but by moving the opening / closing lever 8 (see FIG. 1) integrally attached to the opening / closing plate in the lateral direction, the opening / closing plate also moves in the same direction and discharges. The hole is opened. As a result, the game ball can be dropped from the discharge hole and discharged to the outside of the saucer 7.

Further, the operation handle 5 is formed so that the player can rotate the operation handle 5 in a predetermined direction. Then, when the player rotates the operation handle 5, the game ball received by the upper plate 6 is sent to the launching device (not shown in particular), and the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 5 is increased. The launching device launches the game ball toward the game area 12. The game ball launched in this way is guided by a pair of rails 13a and 13b fixed to the game board 11 and ascends to reach the game area 12.

Here, the game area 12 is fixed to the game board 11 in the space formed between the game board 11 and the transparent board 4 with the main body frame 2 and the front door 3 closed with respect to the machine frame 1. It is a portion partitioned by a pair of rails 13a and 13b into a substantially circular shape, and is a region where a game ball can flow down.
As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming area 12 includes a first gaming area 12a, which is a region on the left side when viewed from a player facing the pachinko machine P, and a region on the right side when viewed from a player facing the pachinko machine P. It is composed of a second gaming area 12b. In these two game areas 12, the possibility of entering the game ball differs depending on the firing intensity of the launching device. Specifically, when the firing intensity of the launching device is less than a predetermined strength (strength that the gaming ball launched by the launching device does not reach the highest point of the gaming area 12), the gaming ball is in the first gaming area. Enter 12a. On the other hand, when the firing intensity of the launching device is equal to or higher than a predetermined strength (the strength at which the gaming ball launched by the launching device can reach the highest point of the gaming area 12), the gaming ball is in the second gaming area 12b. Enter into.

Further, in the game area 12, as shown in FIG. 3, a windmill and a large number of nails for making the flow direction of the game ball irregular, a general winning opening 14 into which the game ball can enter, and a start The first start winning opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16 as areas, the gate 20 through which the game ball can pass, the attacker device 17 that operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game ball are guided to the outside of the game area 12. An out port 19 and an effect display device 21 as an effect device that produces an effect as the game progresses are provided. In FIG. 3, only some nails are shown, and other nails are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3, the general winning openings 14 are provided at positions slightly to the left of the lower center of the game area 12, and when the game balls enter the general winning openings 14, a predetermined number (5 in this embodiment). ) Prize balls will be paid out.
The number and positions of the general winning openings 14 are not particularly limited.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first start winning opening 15 is provided at a position slightly lower than the center of the game area 12, and the second starting winning opening 16 is provided in the game area 12 as shown in FIG. It is located slightly above the center of the right part of. Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, only the game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting winning opening 15, and the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b You cannot enter the ball. Further, only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second start winning opening 16, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 16 is provided with a movable piece 16b (ordinary electric accessory) that can be opened and closed. When the movable piece 16b is closed, the second starting winning opening 16 is in the closed state, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is opened, the second starting winning opening 16 is opened, and the movable piece 16b functions as a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the second starting winning opening 16. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the second starting winning opening 16.
The configuration of the movable piece 16b is not particularly limited, and for example, a pair of blade members that rotate in the left-right direction around an axis orthogonal to the game board 11 to open and close the second starting winning opening 16. , It may be composed of a lid member that opens and closes the second start winning opening 16 by rotating in the front-rear direction about an axis horizontal to the game board 11, or slides in the vertical direction to open and close the second starting winning opening 16. It may be composed of a shutter member that opens and closes 16.
The installation positions of the first start winning opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16 are not particularly limited. For example, the first starting winning opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16 are in any of the game areas 12 ( The game balls flowing down the first game area 12a and the second game area 12b) may also be arranged at positions where they can easily enter.

Then, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, a big hit lottery is performed, and among a plurality of predetermined special symbols. 1 special symbol is determined from. Various game benefits are associated with each special symbol, and according to the type of the determined special symbol, execution of a special game advantageous to the player, execution of a small hit game, setting of a predetermined game state, etc. You can get the game profit of.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 in the normal gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state) described later, A lottery of time-saving symbols is performed to determine whether or not to set the first time-saving game state described later. Then, when the time-saving symbol (time-saving granting symbol) for which the first time-saving game state is set is determined by the lottery, the first time-saving game state is set. Except for the normal game state, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is not performed, and the time-saving symbol (time-saving non-granted symbol) forcibly stipulating that the first time-saving game state is not set is determined. ing.
The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 is not particularly limited as long as it is one or more, and any number may be used. Good. Further, the number of prize balls is the same between the starting winning opening (second starting winning opening 16) in which the movable piece 16b is provided and the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 15) in which the movable piece 16b is not provided. It may be different or different. In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 is 4, based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16. The number of prize balls paid out is one.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gate 20 is provided above the second starting winning opening 16. When the game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery of ordinary symbols, which will be described later, is performed. Then, when the result of the lottery is successful, the movable piece 16b provided in the above-mentioned second starting winning opening 16 is opened for a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the attacker device 17 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 12 (below the second start winning opening 16). The attacker device 17 includes a large winning opening 18 into which a game ball can enter, and an opening / closing door 18b for opening and closing the large winning opening 18. In the normal state, since the opening / closing door 18b is closed and the large winning opening 18 is closed, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 18, but the above-mentioned special game or small hit game Is executed, the opening / closing door 18b is opened and the large winning opening 18 is opened, so that the game ball can enter the large winning opening 18.
Further, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 18, a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this embodiment) are paid out.
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the large winning opening 18, and a game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball. It has become like. Further, although not particularly shown, almost all the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can reach the large winning opening 18 except for those entering the second starting winning opening 16. And windmills are arranged. Therefore, if the game ball is continuously launched as long as the large winning opening 18 is open, the game ball will enter the large winning opening 18.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a turning road 51 is provided inside the attacker device 17 so that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 can roll to the left. There is. The turning road 51 is branched into an upper passage 52 and a lower passage 53 at a predetermined position in the rolling direction, and a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 18 can enter the end of the upper passage 52. A region 58 is provided, and a specific region 57 into which a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 can enter is provided at the end of the lower passage 53 (see FIGS. 4A and 4B).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a distribution member that distributes the game ball to either the upper passage 52 or the lower passage 53 at the position where the upper passage 52 and the lower passage 53 branch off. 59 is provided. The distribution member 59 is rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the game board 11, and is connected to a first position that opens the path to the upper passage 52 and blocks the path to the lower passage 53, and to the upper passage 52. It is possible to displace between the second position that blocks the path of the vehicle and opens the path to the lower passage 53. Then, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 proceeds to the upper passage 52 when the distribution member 59 is located at the first position and enters the general area 58, and the distribution member 59 is located at the second position. When there is, it proceeds to the lower passage 53 and enters the specific area 57.

Further, although not particularly shown, the attacker device 17 includes a specific area discharge port for discharging the game ball that has entered the specific area 57 to the outside of the large winning opening 18 (the back side of the game board 11), and a general area. A general area discharge port for discharging the game ball that has entered the 58 to the outside of the large winning opening 18 (the back side of the game board 11) is provided.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing door 18b and the operating mode (operating pattern) of the sorting member 59 in a specific round game are set for each type of the determined special symbol. It is set.
Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of gaming balls (one in the present embodiment) enter the specific area 57 during a specific round game, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the player. It is set to a gaming state in which a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, which are advantageous gaming states for the player, are combined. On the other hand, when a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during a specific round game (that is, when all the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 18 enter the general area 58). The gaming state after the end of the special gaming is set to a gaming state (normal gaming state) that combines a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 18b, the operation pattern of the distribution member 59, and the setting of the gaming state will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the out opening 19 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 12, and is provided in any of the general winning opening 14, the first starting winning opening 15, the second starting winning opening 16, and the large winning opening 18. Also accepts game balls that did not enter. Then, the game ball received in the out port 19 is guided to the back side of the game board 11 and collected.

As shown in FIG. 3, the effect display device 21 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 12. In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 21. Further, the effect display device 21 is provided with a display unit 21a for displaying an image such as a moving image or a still image, and the background image is displayed on the display unit 21a and the effect symbol 50 (! The dummy symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a variable effect is performed in which the player is notified of the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of determining the time saving symbol, etc., which will be described later, depending on the stop display mode of each effect symbol 50.
The effect display device 21 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and for example, a drum-type display device or the like that performs various displays using a plurality of drums having a pattern on the outer circumference may be used.

The pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment has, as an effect device, as an effect display device 21, a speaker as the above-mentioned sound output device 10, and an effect lighting device 23 that produces an effect by emitting light in various colors and lighting patterns. It is equipped with a lamp (see FIG. 1).
The effect device is not limited to these, and may include, for example, an effect device that can move at various timings and modes.

Further, at the front position of the upper plate 6, an effect operation device 9 is provided that allows the player to operate and switch the effect to be executed during a game, a standby, or the like. The effect operation device 9 in the present embodiment is composed of an operation dial 9a which is a circular ring-shaped frame and can be rotated, and an operation button 9b which is fitted in the operation dial 9a and can be pressed. .. Then, when a predetermined effect is being executed by the effect display device 21, if a rotation operation of the operation dial 9a or a pressing operation of the operation button 9b is performed, various effects such as a variable effect progress or the display is switched to a different display. It is designed to be used.
The effect operation device 9 is not limited to the operation dial 9a, the operation button 9b, etc., and may be provided with a cross key or the like capable of inputting in the up / down / left / right directions. Further, the effect operation device 9 such as the operation dial 9a and the operation button 9b may be provided, and the above-mentioned cross key may be separately provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display device 30 is a device for displaying various situations related to the game on the lower right side of the game board 11 and outside the game area 12. , 2nd special symbol display device 31, 1st special symbol hold display device 38, 2nd special symbol hold display device 39, normal symbol display device 32, normal symbol hold display device 33, and time saving symbol display device 34 are provided. ..

Further, as described above, although the game ball lending device R is electrically connected to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, operations on the game ball lending device R such as lending game balls and ejecting cards can be performed. It is accepted by the pachinko machine P. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine P includes a value information display device 35 that displays value information (balance information) stored in the card, a ball lending button 36 that can be pressed, and a pressing operation. There is a card return button 37 that can be used.

(Structure of control means of pachinko machine P)
Next, the control means for controlling the game and the effect of the pachinko machine P will be described.
The above-mentioned control means is composed of various control boards. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 that controls the basic operation of the game of the pachinko machine P, the launch of the game ball, and the prize ball. It includes a launch / payout control board 200 that controls payout, a sub-control board 300 that controls various effects, and a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the launch / payout control board 200 and the sub-control board 300 are connected to the main control board 100, and the game ball lending control board 400 is connected to the launch / payout control board 200. There is. Further, an external information terminal board 500 for outputting various information on the progress of the game to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a hall computer in the game hall) is connected to the main control board 100 and the launch / payout control board 200. Has been done.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, the launch payout control board 200 controls both the launch of the game ball and the payout of the prize ball, but the board that controls the launch of the game ball (launch control). A substrate) and a substrate for controlling the payout of prize balls (payout control board) may be provided separately.

Further, although not particularly shown, a power supply board is connected to each board included in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment. A backup power supply is provided on this power supply board, and when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the pachinko machine P becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, it is determined that the power supply is disconnected, and a power failure signal is output to the main control board 100. ..

The main control board 100 controls the game performed in the pachinko machine P. Specifically, the main control board 100 starts when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16. Special symbol games to be played (big hit lottery, fluctuations in special symbols), lottery of time-saving symbols and fluctuations of time-saving symbols, and general-purpose game (normal symbol lottery, which is started when the game ball passes through the gate 20) (Fluctuation of ordinary symbols, etc.), special games that are advantageous for players, small hit games, etc. are controlled.
As shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes, a control program for advancing the game, a main ROM 102 that stores data and tables required for the game, and at the time of arithmetic processing. It is provided with a main RAM 103 used as a temporary storage area or the like.
Then, the main CPU 101 reads the control program stored in the main ROM 102 and performs arithmetic processing based on the signals from each detection sensor and timer described later, and also controls and calculates various devices connected to the main CPU 101. Send commands to other boards based on the processing results.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 has a general winning opening detection sensor 14a for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 14, and a game ball entering the first starting winning opening 15. The first start winning opening detection sensor 15a that detects that the ball has hit, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a that detects that the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening 16, and the game ball to the large winning opening 18. A large winning opening detection sensor 18a that detects that the ball has entered, a gate detection sensor 20a that detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 20, and a fraud detection sensor that detects magnetism, radio waves, etc. directed at the game board 11. The 35 and the specific area detection sensor 57a that detects that the game ball has entered the specific area 57 are connected. Then, the detection signals output from each of these detection sensors are input to the main control board 100.
The sensor connected to the main control board 100 is not limited to these, and for example, a general area detection sensor or the like for detecting that the game ball has entered the general area 58 may be provided.

Further, on the main control board 100, as devices to be controlled, the start winning opening solenoid 16c that opens and closes and drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 and the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning opening 18 are opened and closed. The large winning opening solenoid 18c, the sorting member solenoid 59c that displaces the sorting member 59, the first special symbol display device 30, the second special symbol display device 31, the ordinary symbol display device 32, and the time saving symbol display device 34. , The first special figure holding display device 38, the second special figure holding display device 39, and the ordinary symbol holding display device 33 are connected.
Then, by driving each solenoid by the main control board 100, the opening / closing control of the second starting winning opening 16 and the large winning opening 18 and the displacement control of the distribution member 59 are performed, and the display control of each display device is performed. It is supposed to be done.

Although not particularly shown, the launch / payout control board 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM like the main control board 100, and is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. ..

As shown in FIG. 5, the launch payout control board 200 has a touch sensor 5a for detecting that the player touches the operation handle 5 and an operation of the operation handle 5 as a device for controlling the launch of the game ball. An operation volume 5b that detects an angle (rotation angle), a launch stop switch 5c that stops the launch of the game ball, and a ball feed that sends the game ball received in the upper plate 6 to a launcher (not shown). The solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 that launches the game ball are connected. Further, the control signals output from the touch sensor 5a, the operation volume 5b, and the firing stop switch 5c are input to the firing payout control board 200.

Then, when the control signals from the touch sensor 5a and the operation volume 5b are input to the launch / payout control board 200, the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are energized to launch the game ball. Further, while the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are energized, the game balls are continuously launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds (that is, the launch pace of 100 balls per minute). .. On the other hand, when the control signal from the launch stop switch 5c is input to the launch payout control board 200, control is performed to stop the launch of the game ball by stopping the energization of the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61.
As the device for launching the game ball, a rotary solenoid may be used instead of the launch motor 61.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the launch payout control board 200 receives a prize for the game balls stored in the game ball storage unit (not particularly shown) as a device for controlling the payout of the game balls. A payout motor 62 that pays out as a ball and a payout counting switch 63 that detects and counts the paid out game balls are connected. Then, when the launch payout control board 200 receives the payout number command transmitted from the main control board 100, the launch payout control board 200 pays out a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on the payout number command. The payout motor 62 is controlled so as to. At this time, the number of game balls paid out is counted by the payout counting switch 63, and it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) have been paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the launch / payout control board 200 includes a front door open detection sensor 3a for detecting the open state of the front door 3 and a saucer full tank detection sensor 7a for detecting the full tank state of the saucer 7. , Are connected.

When the front door opening detection sensor 3a detects that the front door 3 is open, the front door opening detection sensor 3a outputs an opening detection signal to the firing / payout control board 200, and the opening detection signal is output while the front door 3 is open. It is output continuously. Then, when the release detection signal is input, the launch / payout control board 200 transmits a door opening command to the main control board 100. On the other hand, when the front door opening detection sensor 3a does not detect that the front door 3 is open, the front door opening detection sensor 3a is turned off and the output of the door opening detection signal is stopped. Then, when the input of the door opening detection signal is stopped, the launch / payout control board 200 determines that the front door 3 is closed, and stops transmitting the door opening command to the main control board 100.

The saucer full tank detection sensor 7a is provided at a predetermined position of the saucer 7. When a predetermined amount or more of the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are stored in the saucer 7 and the tank is full, the stored game balls reach the above-mentioned predetermined position.
When the saucer full tank detection sensor 7a detects that the game ball has reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, the saucer full tank detection sensor 7a is turned on and outputs a saucer detection signal to the launch / payout control board 200, and the stored game ball is described above. While the predetermined position is reached, the saucer detection signal is continuously output. Then, when the saucer detection signal is input, the launch / payout control board 200 transmits a saucer full tank command to the main control board 100. On the other hand, the saucer full tank detection sensor 7a is turned off when it does not detect that the game ball has reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, and the output of the saucer detection signal is stopped. Then, when the input of the saucer detection signal is stopped, the launch / payout control board 200 determines that the full tank state of the saucer 7 has been released, and stops transmitting the saucer full tank command to the main control board 100.

Further, as described above, the launch / payout control board 200 is connected to the game ball lending control board 400 that relays the operation to the game ball lending device R. As shown in FIG. 5, the launch / payout control board 200 includes a value information display device 35, a ball lending switch 36a for detecting a pressing operation of the ball lending button 36, and a card return via the game ball lending control board 400. A card return switch 37a that detects the pressing operation of the button 37 is connected.

When the ball lending button 36 is pressed, a detection signal output from the ball lending switch 36a is input to the launch payout control board 200, and the launch payout control board 200 refers to the game ball lending device R with respect to the game ball. Sends a lending request signal requesting lending. Then, when the game ball lending device R receives the lending request signal, the game ball lending device R performs a process of subtracting a predetermined value information from the stored value information and corresponds to the subtracted value information. Control is performed to pay out the number of game balls to be played.
Further, when the card return button 37 is pressed, the detection signal output from the card return switch 37a is input to the launch / payout control board 200, and the launch / payout control board 200 sends the card return control board 200 to the game ball lending device R. Send a return request signal requesting the return of the card. Then, when the game ball lending device R receives the return request signal, the game ball lending device R controls to eject the card.

The sub-control board 300 controls an effect executed during a game, a standby, or the like.
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 300 includes a sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes, a control program for executing the effect, a sub ROM 302 that stores data and tables necessary for executing the effect, and an operation. It includes a sub RAM 303 that is used as a temporary storage area during processing, and is connected so as to enable communication from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300 in one direction.
Then, the sub CPU 301 reads the control program stored in the sub ROM 302 and performs arithmetic processing based on the command transmitted from the main control board 100 and the signal from the timer, and performs image control for controlling the image display. On a board (not shown), a voice control board for controlling voice output (not shown), and an illumination control board for controlling lighting (not shown). , Send a command to execute the effect.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the voice control board and the illumination control board are separately provided, but one board (voice illumination control board) in which the functions of these boards are integrated is provided. ) May be provided, and both the audio output and the lighting of the lighting may be controlled by the substrate.

Further, the effect display device 21 is connected to the sub-control board 300 via the image control board, and the sound output device 10 is connected to the sub-control board 300 via the sound control board. Further, the sub-control board 300 is provided with the effect lighting device 23, the rotation operation detection sensor 9c for detecting the rotation operation of the operation dial 9a, and the pressing operation for detecting the pressing operation of the operation button 9b via the illumination control board. The detection sensor 9d and the detection sensor 9d are connected.

Although not particularly shown, the image control board includes an image CPU, an image ROM, an image RAM, and the like. The image ROM of the image control board stores image data such as the effect symbol 50 and the background displayed on the effect display device 21. Then, based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the image CPU controls the image display by the effect display device 21 by storing the image data read from the image ROM in the image RAM.

Although not particularly shown, the voice control board includes a sound chip (CPU), a sound ROM, a sound RAM, and the like. Sound data such as voice and BGM output from the voice output device 10 is stored in the sound ROM. Then, the audio output from the audio output device 10 is controlled by storing the sound data read from the sound ROM in the sound RAM based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 300.

The illumination control board controls the lighting of the lighting by the effect lighting device 23 based on the command from the sub control board 300. Further, the illumination control board has a rotation operation detection signal output from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c based on the rotation operation of the operation dial 9a, or a push operation detection signal output from the pressing operation detection sensor 9d based on the pressing operation of the operation button 9b. When the operation detection signal is input, a predetermined command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(Outline of the game of pachinko machine P)
Next, the game in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment will be described based on various tables stored in the main ROM 102.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the special figure game and the normal figure game proceed in parallel. Further, as the gaming state when advancing both of these games, there are either a low-probability gaming state (so-called non-probability changing state) or a high-probability gaming state (so-called probabilistic changing state), and a non-probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state. Any of the gaming states of the states and any of the gaming states in which are combined are set. In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, two time-saving game states, a first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state, are provided, and one of the time-saving game states is set. There is.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state), a low-probability gaming state, and a first time-saving gaming state are combined. A gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a first low-probability time-saving gaming state), a gaming state combining a low-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a second low-probability time-saving gaming state) or a high-probability gaming state and a second One of the gaming states (hereinafter referred to as high-probability time-saving gaming states) in which the time-saving gaming states are combined is set.

Here, the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are gaming states in which the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be different depending on the jackpot lottery described later, and in the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot is won by the jackpot lottery. The winning probability is set to a higher value than the low probability gaming state. That is, it is easier to win the jackpot by the jackpot lottery in the high-probability gaming state than in the low-probability gaming state.

Further, the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are game states in which the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 is set to be different, and in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game The movable piece 16b is set to be more easily maintained in the open state (that is, the second start winning opening 16 is more likely to be in the open state) than in the state. That is, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16 in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, two time-saving gaming states, a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state, are provided, but in the second time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state is provided. The movable piece 16b is set so as to be more easily maintained in the open state than in the one-hour short game state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the game ball is most likely to enter the second start winning opening 16 during the second time saving game state, and then the second starting winning opening 16 is during the first time saving gaming state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the ball, and it is most difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 16 during the non-time-saving game state.
In the initial state immediately after factory shipment or after reset, the normal game state is set.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 enters the first starting winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, the player A big hit lottery is held to determine a special symbol associated with the game profit.
Then, when a jackpot is won by this jackpot lottery, a special game is executed in which the jackpot 18 is opened and a game ball can be inserted into the jackpot 18, and further, after the special game is completed. The gaming state of is set to either a normal gaming state, a second low-probability time-saving gaming state, or a high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, after the end of the special game, the state shifts to either a normal game state, a second low-probability time-saving game state, or a high-probability time-saving game state.

Further, when a small hit is won by the above-mentioned big hit lottery, the large winning opening 18 is opened and a small hit game in which a game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 18 is executed. Then, in this small hit game, when the game ball enters the large winning opening 18, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as described above. The game state after the end of the small hit game remains the same as the game state before the start of the small hit game. That is, when the small hit game is executed, the game state does not change.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 during the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is performed.
Then, when the time-saving symbol (the time-saving granting symbol) for which the first time-saving game state is set is determined by the lottery of the time-saving symbol, the low-probability gaming state is set without changing. It is supposed to be done. That is, when the time-saving symbol for setting the first time-saving gaming state is determined, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the time-saving symbol (the time-saving non-granting symbol) for which the first time-saving gaming state is not set is determined, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
As described above, in the other game states, the time-saving symbols (time-saving non-granted symbols) that are determined not to set the first time-saving game state forcibly without the lottery of the time-saving symbols are performed. It is determined. Then, it is set so that the gaming state does not change based on the determination.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning opening 15. Further, the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting winning opening 16, and enter the large winning opening 18.
Then, during the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, the player launches the game ball toward the first game area 12a so that the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15. During the second low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state, and special game, a game ball enters the grand prize opening 18 or the game ball passes through the gate 20. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so as to enter the second start winning opening 16.
Specifically, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the special game, a display indicating that the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b is displayed on the effect display device 21. Therefore, during the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, the effect display device 21 displays an instruction to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a.

The jackpot lottery and the time-saving symbol lottery are stored in various random numbers acquired when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 and in the main ROM 102. It is performed based on various tables for determining the random number.
Here, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment has, as random numbers related to the jackpot lottery, a jackpot random number used for determining the result of the jackpot lottery, a special symbol random number used for determining the type of the special symbol, and a variation pattern described later. It has a variation pattern random number used to determine the command. Further, as a random number related to the lottery of the time-saving symbol, the time-saving symbol random number used for determining the time-saving symbol is included.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the hardware random numbers built in the main control board 100 are used for the above-mentioned jackpot random numbers and time-saving symbol random numbers. The jackpot random number and the time saving symbol random number are updated according to a certain rule, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence goes around, and the start value is changed every time the system is reset.
Further, the variation pattern command is for determining a variation effect pattern (variation time, mode) capable of notifying the result of the lottery of the jackpot and the result of the lottery of the time saving symbol. The random numbers used to determine the variation pattern command are not limited to those described above, and for example, other random numbers may be used in addition to this random number.

Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, random numbers are acquired for each of the above random numbers, and each random number is stored in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103. It has become like.
This reserved storage area is each random number value (hereinafter referred to as the first special figure random number) and the time saving symbol random number (hereinafter referred to as the first special figure random number) of the random numbers related to the jackpot lottery acquired by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15. , The first reserved storage area for storing the first time-saving symbol random number, and each random number value of the random number related to the jackpot lottery acquired by entering the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 (referred to as the first time-saving symbol random number). Hereinafter, it is composed of a second reserved storage area for storing a second special figure random number) and a time-saving random number (hereinafter, referred to as a second time-saving symbol random number). Each of these reserved storage areas is composed of a total of four storage units from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and includes a total of four sets of the first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number, and the second. A total of 4 sets of special figure random numbers and 2nd time saving symbol random numbers can be stored.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15, the first special figure random number and the first time saving symbol random number are transmitted from the first storage unit of the first reserved storage area. It is designed to be memorized in order. For example, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in a state where the first special symbol random number and the first time saving symbol random number are not stored in any of the storage units of the first reserved storage area, The first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number acquired with this as an opportunity are stored in the first storage unit of the first reserved storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number and the first time saving symbol random number are stored in the first storage unit of the first reserved storage area, this The first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number acquired in the wake of the above are stored in the second storage unit of the first reserved storage area. In addition, a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number and the first time saving symbol random number are stored in the first storage unit and the second storage unit of the first reserved storage area. In this case, the first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number acquired with this as an opportunity are stored in the third storage unit of the first reserved storage area. In addition, a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number and the first time saving symbol random number are stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit of the first reserved storage area. In this case, the first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number acquired with this as an opportunity are stored in the fourth storage unit of the first reserved storage area. Then, in a state where the first special figure random number and the first time saving symbol random number are stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first reserved storage area, the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15. In this case, the first special symbol random number and the first time saving symbol random number related to this entry are not stored.

Similarly, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, the second special symbol random number and the second time-saving symbol random number are stored in order from the first storage unit of the second reserved storage area. .. Since the specific memory processing is the same as the storage of the first special figure random number and the first time-saving symbol random number described above, the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of sets of the first special figure random number and the first time-saving symbol random number stored in the first hold storage area (hereinafter referred to as the first hold number) is the first hold number. The number of sets of the second special figure random number and the second time-saving symbol random number (hereinafter referred to as the second hold number) stored in the counter (not particularly shown) and stored in the second hold storage area is the second. It is stored in a hold count counter (not shown).
In this specification, as described above, it is "held" that the first special figure random number and the first time-saving symbol random number, the second special figure random number and the second time-saving symbol random number are stored in the hold storage area. And "holding memory", and the first holding number and the second holding number are also simply called "holding number".

Then, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment has a jackpot random number determination table 110 for determining the result of the jackpot lottery, a special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of the special symbol, and a time-saving symbol in the time-saving symbol lottery. Time-saving symbol random number determination table 112 for determining the type of, special electric accessory operation table for controlling the special game executed when a big hit is won and the small hit game executed when a small hit is won. 113, the game state setting table 114 for setting the game state after the time-saving symbol for setting the first time-saving game state or after the end of the special game is determined, and the variation pattern command are determined. It has a variation pattern table 115 for the purpose.
The table related to the lottery for big hits is not limited to these, and if it is necessary to make a determination or determination based on a random number, a table may be provided as appropriate.

The jackpot random number determination table 110 is for determining the result of the jackpot lottery, and as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the jackpot random number determination table 110 and the low probability determination table 110a referred to in the low probability gaming state. The high-probability determination table 110b, which is referred to in the high-probability gaming state, is provided.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, one jackpot random number is acquired within the numerical range of 0 to 65535. Then, the jackpot random number determination table 110 of either the low probability determination table 110a or the high probability determination table 110b is selected according to the game state at the time of performing the jackpot lottery, and the acquired jackpot random number and the selected jackpot random number are selected. The result of the jackpot lottery is determined based on the determination table 110.

As shown in FIG. 6A, according to the low probability determination table 110a, when the jackpot random number is 1000 to 1434, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot random number is 1435 to 2744, it is determined to be a small hit. If it is a big hit random number (0 to 999, 2745 to 65535) other than this, it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the winning probability of the big hit in the low probability determination table 110a is about 1/150, and the winning probability of the small hit is about 1/50.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, according to the high probability determination table 110b, it is determined that the jackpot random number is 1000 to 1594, and the jackpot random number is 1595 to 2904. If it is a big hit random number (0 to 999, 295 to 65535) other than this, it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the winning probability of the big hit in the high probability determination table 110b is about 1/110, and the winning probability of the small hit is about 1/50.
That is, the high probability determination table 110b is set so that the jackpot winning probability is approximately 1.4 times that of the low probability determination table 110a.

Further, the jackpot random numbers (1000 to 1434) determined to be jackpots in the low probability determination table 110a are set to be included in the jackpot random numbers (1000 to 1594) determined to be jackpots in the high probability determination table 110b. That is, the jackpot random number determined to be a jackpot in the low probability determination table 110a is also determined to be a jackpot in the high probability determination table 110b.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, even if the big hit lottery is performed based on either the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number, the small hit can be won. It may be set so that a small hit can be won only when a big hit lottery is performed based on either one of the 1 special figure random number and the 2nd special figure random number.

The special symbol random number determination table 111 is for determining the type of the special symbol, and as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, when a big hit lottery is performed by the first special symbol random number. The first start winning opening determination table 111a referred to in the above, and the second starting winning opening determination table 111b referred to when a big hit lottery is performed by the second special figure random number are provided.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, one special symbol random number is acquired within the numerical range of 0 to 199. Then, when the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is performed, a special symbol random number determination of either the first start winning opening determination table 111a or the second starting winning opening determination table 111b is performed according to the starting winning opening in which the game ball enters. Table 111 is selected, and the type of special symbol is determined based on the acquired special symbol random number and the selected special symbol random number determination table 111.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3, X4) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as jackpot symbols) determined when a jackpot is won. , Two types of small hit symbols (Y1, Y2) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as small hit symbols) that are determined when a small hit is won, and specials that are determined in the case of loss. Two types of lost symbols (Z1, Z2) are provided as symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as lost symbols).

As shown in FIG. 7A, according to the first start winning opening determination table 111a, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 1, and the special symbol is determined. The jackpot symbol X2 is determined when the random number is 2 to 139, and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined when the special symbol random number is 140 to 199. That is, in the first start winning opening determination table 111a, when the jackpot is won, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 is determined is 15%, and the probability that the jackpot symbol X2 is determined is 85%.
Further, in the case of winning a small hit, the small hit symbol Y1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 99, and the small hit symbol Y2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 100 to 199. .. That is, in the first start winning opening determination table 111a, when a small hit is won, the probability that the small hit symbol Y1 is determined and the probability that the small hit symbol Y2 is determined are both 50%. ..
Further, in the case of loss, the lost symbol Z1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 19, and the lost symbol Z2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 20 to 199. That is, in the first start winning opening determination table 111a, in the case of loss, the probability that the lost symbol Z1 is determined is 10%, and the probability that the lost symbol Z2 is determined is 90%.

As shown in FIG. 7B, according to the second start winning opening determination table 111b, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 139, and the special symbol is determined. When the random number is 140 to 199, the jackpot symbol X4 is determined. That is, in the second start winning opening determination table 111b, when the jackpot is won, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 is determined is 70%, and the probability that the jackpot symbol X4 is determined is 30%.
Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the type of the small hit symbol determined when the small hit is won and the probability of determining the type, and the type of the lost symbol determined in the case of loss and the type thereof. The determination probability of is set to the same content as that of the first start winning opening determination table 111a.

The time-saving symbol random number determination table 112 is for determining the type of the time-saving symbol in the time-saving symbol lottery, and as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the time-saving symbol random number is used to determine the type of the time-saving symbol. The first time-saving symbol random number determination table 112a referred to when the lottery is performed, and the second time-saving symbol random number determination table 112b referred to when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed by the second time-saving symbol random number. I have.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, one time-saving symbol random number is acquired within the numerical range of 0 to 65535. Then, when the set gaming state is the normal gaming state at the time when the variation of the special symbol and the time saving symbol described later is started, the time saving symbol is drawn. When the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, the first time-saving symbol random number determination table 112a or the second time-saving symbol random number determination is performed according to the starting winning opening (first time-saving symbol random number or second time-saving symbol random number) into which the game ball has entered. Any one of the time-saving symbol random number determination tables 112 in the table 112b is selected, and the type of the time-saving symbol is determined based on the acquired time-saving symbol random number and the selected time-saving symbol random number determination table 112.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as the type of the time-saving symbol determined in the lottery of the time-saving symbol, the fact that the first time-saving gaming state is set and the number of times the time-saving gaming state is continued (hereinafter referred to as the number of time saving) is 20 times. Two types of time-saving symbols J1 (hereinafter, also referred to as time-saving granting symbols) and time-saving symbols J2 (hereinafter, also referred to as time-saving non-granting symbols), which are specified not to set the first time-saving gaming state, are provided. ing.

As shown in FIG. 8A, according to the first time-saving symbol random number determination table 112a, when the time-saving symbol random number is 0 to 654, the time-saving symbol J1 (time-saving assigned symbol) is determined, and the time-saving symbol random number is generated. When it is 655 to 65535, the time saving symbol J2 (time saving non-granted symbol) is determined. That is, in the first time-saving symbol random number determination table 112a, the probability that the time-saving symbol J1 is determined is about 1/100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, according to the second time-saving symbol random number determination table 112b, when the time-saving symbol random number is 0 to 65535 (that is, regardless of the value of the time-saving symbol random number). The time saving symbol J2 (time saving non-granted symbol) is determined. That is, in the second time-saving symbol random number determination table 112b, the time-saving symbol J1 is not determined, and the time-saving symbol J2 is always determined.

As described above, at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol and the time saving symbol is started, the set gaming state is other than the normal gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state, high probability). In the case of the time saving game state), the time saving symbol J2 is forcibly determined without performing the above-mentioned time saving symbol lottery.

The special electric accessory operating table 113 is for controlling a special game executed when a big hit is won and a small hit game executed when a small hit is won, and is for controlling a special game and a small hit game. It is referred to for operating the large winning opening solenoid 18c and the distribution member solenoid 59c during execution. In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D, the first special electric accessory operating table 113 is referred to when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. The operating table 113a, the second operating table 113b that is referred to when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, and the third operating table that is referred to when the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined by winning the jackpot. A 113c and a fourth operating table 113d, which is referred to when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined by winning the small hit, are provided.

Specifically, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the special game is executed with reference to the first operation table 113a shown in FIG. 9A. According to the first operation table 113a, the process ends when either the condition that the large winning opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or the large winning opening 18 is filled with 10 game balls is satisfied. The round game is executed 10 times in total from 1 round to 10 rounds. Further, during each round game, the opening / closing door 18b is displaced from the closed position to the open position, is positioned at the open position for 29.0 seconds, and then is displaced from the open position to the closed position (opening / closing pattern). As a result, the large winning opening 18 is opened only once, and the time (that is, interval time) for closing the large winning opening 18 between each round game is set to 2.0 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the first position during each round of the 1st round, 2nd round, 4th round to 10th round. It is designed to operate in a mode (operation pattern) of being (positioned). On the other hand, during the three-round round game, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner of staying at the second position.

Further, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the special game is executed with reference to the second operation table 113b shown in FIG. 9B. According to the second operation table 113b, the round game ending under the same conditions as the above-mentioned first operation table 113a is executed 10 times in total from 1 round to 10 rounds. The opening / closing pattern and interval time of the opening / closing door 18b are also set to be the same as those of the first operation table 113a.
Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during each round of the 1st round, 2nd round, 4th round to 10th round. Similarly, the distribution member 59 operates in a mode of staying at the first position, and further, the distribution member 59 operates in a mode of stopping at the first position even during the round game of three rounds. It has become.

Further, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, the special game is executed with reference to the third operation table 113c shown in FIG. 9 (c). According to the third operation table 113c, the round game ending under the same conditions as the first operation table 113a and the second operation table 113b described above is executed a total of four times from the first round to the fourth round. The opening / closing pattern and interval time of the opening / closing door 18b are set to be the same as those of the first operating table 113a and the second operating table 113b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, the jackpot symbol X1 and the jackpot symbol X2 are determined during each round of the 1st round, 2nd round, and 4th round. As in the case of the above, the distribution member 59 is operated in a manner of staying at the first position, and further, during the round game of 3 rounds, the distribution member X2 is distributed in the same manner as when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined. The member 59 operates in a manner of staying at the first position.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the big winning opening 18 is continuously displayed for 29.0 seconds in the three round round game (specific round game). Since the distribution member 59 is opened and stays at the second position, as long as the game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, the game balls enter the large winning opening 18 and a predetermined number of the game balls are surely entered. The game ball can be made to enter the specific area 57.
On the other hand, when the jackpot symbols X2, X3 or X4 are determined, the jackpot 18 is continuously opened for 29.0 seconds in the round game of 3 rounds, but the distribution member 59 is in the first position. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the large winning opening 18, all the game balls enter the general area 58, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area 57.

Further, when the small hit is won and the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the small hit game is executed with reference to the fourth operation table 113d shown in FIG. 9D. According to the fourth operation table 113d, the large winning opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and when 10 game balls enter while the first large winning opening 18 is open, the large winning opening 18 is opened. Closes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, the distribution member 59 operates in a mode of first stopping during the small hit game.
As described above, in the small hit game, since the large winning opening 18 opens only for 0.05 seconds, it is almost impossible to insert the game ball into the large winning opening 18. Further, since the distribution member 50 stays at the first position during the small hit game, even if the game ball enters the large winning opening 18, the game ball enters the general area 58 and the game ball is placed in the specific area. It is impossible to enter 57.

The game state setting table 114 shows the game state after the end of the special game when the special game is executed, and after the time saving symbol J1 (time saving symbol) is determined in the lottery of the time saving symbol during the normal game state. It is for setting the game state of.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a special game is executed, the type of the jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game, and the specified area 57 during the special game are specified. The game state after the end of the special game is set according to whether or not a number of game balls (one in this embodiment) have entered. Further, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined during the normal gaming state, the gaming state defined in the time saving symbol J1 is set. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area 57 is set according to the determined type of jackpot symbol, and is substantially determined. The jackpot symbol determines whether or not to shift to the high-probability time-saving game state after the end of the special game based on the decision.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after winning a big hit in the low-probability time-saving gaming state and shifting to the high-probability gaming state, the pachinko machine P is continuously in the high-probability gaming state without shifting to the low-probability gaming state. The jackpot symbol with which the settings are associated has been determined, and the number of times the jackpot symbol has been determined in succession (hereinafter referred to as the number of consecutive high-probability settings) has reached a predetermined upper limit (10000 in this embodiment). Occasionally, a low-probability game state is forcibly set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol. That is, if the above-mentioned jackpot symbols are continuously determined up to the upper limit number of times without shifting to the low-probability gaming state through the execution of the special game, the high-probability gaming state is reached after the special game based on the determination is completed. The low-probability gaming state is forcibly set even when the condition for setting is satisfied.
Similarly, after winning a jackpot in the non-time-saving game state and shifting to the time-saving game state (in this embodiment, the second time-saving game state), the time-saving game state is continuously set without shifting to the non-time-saving game state. When the jackpot symbol associated with is determined and the number of times the jackpot symbol is continuously determined (hereinafter referred to as the number of consecutive time reduction settings) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10000 in this embodiment). After the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol, the non-time saving game state is forcibly set. That is, if the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is continuously determined up to the maximum number of times without shifting to the non-time-saving game state through the execution of the special game, the time-saving game state is changed after the end of the special game based on the determination. Even when the set conditions are met, the non-time saving game state is forcibly set.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of consecutive high-accuracy settings and the number of continuous time-saving settings cannot reach 10,000 in view of the set jackpot winning probability and the determination probability of each jackpot symbol. , Substantially, the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will continue until the condition for setting the low-probability gaming state and the condition for setting the non-time-saving gaming state are satisfied.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined as the game state setting table 114, and a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the specific area 57 during the special game. The first game state setting table 114a referred to when entering, and the second game referred to when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game. The state setting table 114b, the third game state setting table 114c which is referred to when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, and the row during the normal game state. A fourth game state setting table 114d, which is referred to when the time saving symbol J1 (time saving assigned symbol) is determined in the lottery of the time saving symbol, is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the continuous high probability setting number is predetermined. When the upper limit has not been reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability gaming state, and the number of continuations of the high-probability gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the high-probability number of times) is set to 10,000. Along with this, when the continuous time reduction setting number has not reached the predetermined upper limit number, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second time reduction game state, and the time reduction number is set to 10,000 times. To.
That is, in the above case, when the continuous high probability setting number and the continuous time reduction setting number have not reached the upper limit number, the result of the big hit lottery is derived 10,000 times after the end of the special game without winning the big hit. Until then, the high-probability game state and the second time-saving game state (that is, the high-probability time-saving game state) continue. As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is about 1/110, so that the probability of winning the jackpot is substantially reduced until the jackpot is won again. The gaming state will continue.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the continuous high probability set number of times has reached a predetermined upper limit number, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the low probability game state, and the continuous time is shortened. When the set number of times has reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time saving game state.

As described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the second position during the three rounds in the special game, so as long as the game ball is launched into the second game area 12b. Always enters a predetermined number of game balls into the specific area 57. That is, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, as long as the game ball is launched into the second game area 12b, the high-probability time-saving game state is surely set.
Further, although not particularly shown, when a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game even though the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game is changed. , The low-probability time-saving game state and the non-time-saving game state (that is, the normal game state) are set.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the end of the special game is low. It is set to the probability time saving game state. Along with this, when the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit number and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time reduction game state (that is, the first time reduction game state). The gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second time saving game state, and the number of time saving is set to 10,000 times.
That is, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving gaming state, the result of the jackpot lottery without winning the jackpot. Is derived 10,000 times, the low-probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state (that is, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue. As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is about 1/150, so that the second low is substantially until the jackpot is won again. Probability time saving game state will continue.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has not reached the predetermined upper limit number and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the non-time reduction game state, the special game The game state after the end is set to the non-time saving game state. Similarly, even when the continuous time reduction set number of times has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time reduction game state. That is, in any case, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (that is, the normal gaming state).

As described above, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the first position during the three rounds in the special game, so that a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57. There is no such thing. That is, whenever the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, either the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state is set.

As shown in FIG. 10 (c), when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the end of the special game has a low probability of shortening the time. It is set to the game state. Along with this, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has not reached the predetermined upper limit number, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second time reduction game state, and the time reduction number is set to 100 times. To.
That is, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the low-probability gaming state and the second time reduction game are held until the result of the jackpot lottery is derived 100 times without winning the jackpot. The state (that is, the second low-probability time-saving game state) continues.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has reached a predetermined upper limit number, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time reduction game state. That is, at this time, the gaming state after the end of the special gaming is set to the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (that is, the normal gaming state).

As described above, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the first position during the three rounds in the special game, so that a predetermined number of game balls may enter the specific area 57. Absent. That is, whenever the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, either the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state is set.

As shown in FIG. 10D, when the time saving symbol J1 (time saving symbol) is determined in the lottery of the time saving symbol during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low probability gaming state. It is set to the first time saving game state without any problem, and the number of time saving is set to 20 times. That is, in this case, the low-probability gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state (that is, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the result of the jackpot lottery is derived 20 times without winning the jackpot. ..

Here, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined in the above-mentioned time saving symbol lottery and the jackpot lottery executed in association with the time saving symbol lottery is lost, it is based on the jackpot lottery. After the change of the special symbol is stopped (at the start of the change of the next special symbol), the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving game state is set. In addition, when a small hit is won in the big hit lottery executed in association with the lottery of the time saving symbol, after the small hit game based on the small hit winning is completed (the first after the small hit game is completed). (At the start of the change of the special symbol), the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving game state is set.

On the other hand, when the time saving symbol J1 (time saving symbol) is determined in the above-mentioned lottery of the time saving symbol, the big hit is won in the big hit lottery executed in association with the lottery of the time saving symbol. Occasionally, the first low-probability time-saving game state is not set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 and after the end of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot (at the start of the change of the first special symbol after the end of the special game). , The game state is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol determined based on the winning of the jackpot. That is, when the determination of the time saving symbol J1 and the determination of the jackpot symbol (winning of the jackpot) overlap, the determination of the time saving symbol J1 is invalidated and the game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol is set. If the game state is set with priority over the special game based on the determination of the time saving symbol J1, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot may change, and the special game ends after confirming the presence or absence of the change. It is necessary to set the game state later, and the process of setting the game state may become complicated. However, by doing so as described above, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of such a situation.

The variation pattern table 115 is for determining the variation pattern command as described above.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the time saving symbol are determined as described above, the variation pattern command is determined based on the result of the determination. As described above, the variation pattern command is for determining the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the variation pattern command is used to determine the mode and variation time of the variation effect (variation display of special symbol and variation display of time-saving symbol). ) Is determined. In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the variation effect is divided into a first half portion and a second half portion, and the mode and variation time of the first half portion of the variation effect, and the mode and variation time of the second half portion of the variation effect are all. , It is determined by the fluctuation pattern command.
Specifically, the determined variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300, and the sub control board 300 is based on the received variation pattern command, and is a specific mode of variation effect (for example). , The image to be displayed on the display unit 21a, etc.) is determined.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern commands are provided, and each fluctuation pattern command is associated with the fluctuation pattern table 115. Then, the type and determination ratio of the variation pattern command to be determined are set for each variation pattern table 115.

The pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment uses the variable pattern table 115 as a game ball to the first start winning opening 15 during a normal game state or a first low-probability time-saving game state (that is, while hitting left). Table A, which is referred to when the ball enters, is in the second low-probability time-saving game state or in the high-probability time-saving game state (that is, right-handed), and the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16. It has a table B and a table C that are referred to when the ball enters (see FIG. 11).

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state and shifting to at least one of the second time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, While the jackpots won consecutively without shifting to the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (from the so-called first hit to at least one of the second time-saving gaming state or the high-probability shortening gaming state) continues. Table B is referred to when the condition that the number of consecutive winning jackpots, hereinafter referred to as continuous jackpots) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three times, etc.) is not satisfied, and the condition is satisfied. Table C is referenced in.

Then, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, one variation pattern random number is acquired within the numerical range of 0 to 249, and the acquired variation pattern random number and the acquired variation pattern random number are used. The special symbols and time-saving symbols determined as described above, the current number of holdings (first holding number or second holding number), the current gaming state, and the above-mentioned conditions (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number). The variation pattern command is determined based on the variation pattern table 115 according to the success or failure of the establishment of).

Although not particularly shown, the variation pattern table 115 includes a case where a game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 during a normal game state or a first low-probability time-saving game state, or a second. It also has a table that is referred to when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during a low-probability time-saving game state or a high-probability time-saving game state. However, as long as the display of the instruction for launching the game ball on the effect display device 21 is followed, the game ball enters only the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state. During the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game ball enters only the second start winning opening 16. Therefore, the ball enters the second start winning opening 16 during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the first start during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state. The entry of the game ball into the winning opening 15 is irregular, and in the following, such an irregular entry is not considered, and the first is during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state. 1 It is assumed that the game ball enters the start winning opening 15 and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state.

Then, when the variation pattern command is determined with reference to Table A (when the variation pattern command is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15), the first hold number at that time point. Is referenced. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command is determined with reference to the table B or the table C (when the variation pattern command is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16), the relevant case is concerned. The second pending number at the time is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 11A, according to Table A, the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined (that is, the result of the big hit lottery is lost), and the time saving symbol J2 (that is, the time saving non-granting symbol) is determined. ) Is determined and the current first hold number is 0 or 1, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern of "13 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds, The fluctuation pattern command "00H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 13 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is "20 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 229. The fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with (the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time in the first half was set to 13 seconds and the fluctuation time in the second half was set to 7 seconds) was determined, and the fluctuation pattern random numbers were 230 to 239. Occasionally, a fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 20 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 25 seconds) is determined. Fluctuation pattern When the random number was 240 to 249, a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half was set to 20 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half was set to 40 seconds) was associated. The fluctuation pattern command "03H" is determined.

Further, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the time saving symbol J2 is determined, and the current first hold number is 2 or more, when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 209, "3 seconds variation". The fluctuation pattern command "04H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time in the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time in the second half is set to 3 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 10 When it was 229, the fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" was determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number was 230 to 239, the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" was determined. The associated variation pattern command "02H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.

Further, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the time-saving symbol J1 (that is, the time-saving granting symbol) is determined, when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 124 regardless of the current first hold number. The fluctuation pattern command "12H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the fluctuation pattern associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation. The pattern command "13H" is determined.

Further, when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (that is, the result of the big hit lottery is the winning of the small hit) and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, it fluctuates regardless of the current number of first hold. When the pattern random number is 0 to 124, the fluctuation pattern command "22H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined. The variation pattern command "23H" associated with the variation pattern of "" is determined.
Further, when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, "45 seconds fluctuation" is performed when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124 regardless of the current number of first hold. The fluctuation pattern command "32H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds" is associated is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "33H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is associated is determined. It is determined.

Further, when the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X3 are determined (that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot winning) and the time saving symbols J1 or J2 are determined (the determined time saving symbols are J1 or J2). Regardless of the number of the first hold at the present time), when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is associated is When the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 11B, according to Table B, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the time saving symbol J2 is determined, and the current second hold number is 0 or 1, it fluctuates. When the pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern command "00H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 239, "45 seconds fluctuation" is determined. The variation pattern command "02H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined. Is determined.

In addition, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the time saving symbol J2 is determined, and the current second hold number is 2 or more, when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 209, "3 seconds variation". The variation pattern command "04H" associated with the variation pattern of "45 seconds" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 210 to 239, the variation pattern command "02H" associated with the variation pattern of "45 seconds variation" is determined. Is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.

Further, when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, "45 seconds fluctuation" is performed when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124 regardless of the current number of second holds. The fluctuation pattern command "22H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds" is associated is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "23H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is associated is determined. It is determined.

Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, the variation pattern random number is "45 seconds variation" when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 124, regardless of the current second hold number. The variation pattern command "A2H" associated with the variation pattern is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 125-249, the variation pattern command "A3H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), according to the table C, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the time saving symbol J2 is determined, and the current second hold number is 0 or 1, it fluctuates. When the pattern random number is 0 to 209, a fluctuation pattern called "26 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 26 seconds) is associated with the fluctuation. When the pattern command "05H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 239, the fluctuation pattern "90 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 60 seconds). The fluctuation pattern command "06H" associated with the fluctuation pattern) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 30 seconds, the second half). The variation pattern command "07H" associated with the variation pattern) in which the variation time of the portion is set to 90 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the time saving symbol J2 is determined, and the current second hold number is 2 or more, when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 209, "6 seconds variation". The fluctuation pattern command "08H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 6 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 10 When it was 239, the fluctuation pattern command "06H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "90 seconds fluctuation" was determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number was 240 to 249, the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" was changed. The associated variation pattern command "07H" is determined.

Further, when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, "90 seconds variation" is obtained when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 124 regardless of the current second hold number. The fluctuation pattern command "26H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds" is associated is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "27H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" is associated is determined. It is determined.

Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, the variation pattern random number is "90 seconds variation" when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 124, regardless of the current second hold number. The variation pattern command "A6H" associated with the variation pattern is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 125-249, the variation pattern command "A7H" associated with the variation pattern of "120 seconds variation" is determined. Will be done.

As described above, the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined in the table C is set to be longer than the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined in the table B. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state, after the above-mentioned condition is satisfied (before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number) than before the above-mentioned condition is satisfied (continuous jackpot). After the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times), the determination rate of the long fluctuation time is higher.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied, there is an interval from winning the jackpot to winning the next jackpot than before the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied. As a result, the number of special games executed per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the gambling becomes extremely high, such as a large number of special games being executed in a short period of time and the number of prize balls acquired by the player rapidly increasing. be able to.

The variation pattern command determined as described above is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and based on the variation pattern command, a specific mode of the first half of the variation effect and a specific aspect of the second half of the variation effect are determined. To. Then, the variation effect is executed according to the specific mode determined in this way, and the total of the variation time of the first half portion and the variation time of the second half portion set in the variation pattern command is the variation effect (of the special symbol). It is the time from the start to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the time saving symbol).
For example, if the determined fluctuation pattern command is "02H" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 20 seconds, the fluctuation time of the second half is 25 seconds), the fluctuation time of the first half and the fluctuation time of the second half are The total value of 45 seconds (= 20 seconds + 25 seconds) is the fluctuation time of the entire variation effect (the entire variation display of the special symbol and the entire variation display of the time-saving symbol).
In the fluctuation pattern commands of "00H", "04H", "05H", and "08H", "0 seconds" is defined as the fluctuation time of the first half portion. When these variation pattern commands are determined, the entire variation effect is executed during the variation time of the corresponding latter half portion in the manner determined according to the variation pattern command.

Further, based on the above-mentioned fluctuation time, the effect display device 21 performs the fluctuation effect, and the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31) displays the variation of the special symbol. Then, the time-saving symbol display device 34 performs variable display of the time-saving symbol.
Specifically, when the starting winning opening 15 into which the game ball has entered is the first starting winning opening 15, the first special symbol display device 30 blinks and displays during the above-mentioned fluctuation time, and the game ball enters the ball. When the starting winning opening is the second starting winning opening 16, the second special symbol display device 31 blinks and displays during the above-mentioned fluctuation time. Further, during the above-mentioned fluctuation time, the time saving symbol display device 34 is blinked and displayed together with the blinking display of the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. Then, after the lapse of the fluctuation time, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the determined time saving symbol is stopped and displayed.

Regarding the mode of the variation effect, neither the first half of the variation effect nor the second half of the variation effect is determined based on the variation pattern command, but other commands other than the variation pattern command. Is determined, the mode of the first half of the variation effect is determined based on one of the commands, and the mode of the second half of the variation effect may be determined based on the other command.
Further, the variation effect may be divided into more parts instead of being divided into the first half part and the second half part, and the mode of each part may be determined based on the corresponding command.

Next, the processing related to the Fuzu game will be described.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 passes through the gate 20, the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 is operated. A lottery for ordinary symbols is performed to determine whether or not to open the movable piece 16b. Then, when the winning is achieved by the lottery of the normal symbol, the movable piece 16b is opened for a predetermined time, and the second starting winning opening 16 is opened, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. It will be easy.
This lottery of ordinary symbols is based on a winning random number acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 20 and a winning random number determination table 116 stored in the main ROM 102 for determining the random number. Is done.

Then, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, the above-mentioned hit determination random number is acquired, and the random number values are stored in the normal figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 103 up to four. Specifically, this normal figure reservation storage area is composed of a total of four storage units from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and is stored from the first storage unit in the order of passage through the gate 20. It has become. Further, when the hit determination random number is already stored in some storage units, the hit determination random number is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number among the empty storage units. Then, when four hit determination random numbers are already stored in the normal figure hold storage area, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20, the hit decision random numbers related to this passage are not stored in the normal figure hold storage area. ..
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the hardware random number built in the main control board 100 is used as the hit determination random number. This hit determination random number is updated according to a certain rule, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence goes around, and the start value is changed every time the system is reset.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of hit determination random numbers stored in the normal figure hold storage area (hereinafter referred to as the normal figure hold number) is a normal figure hold number counter (not particularly shown). It is supposed to be remembered in.

The winning determination random number determination table 116 is for determining whether or not a winning is achieved by a lottery of ordinary symbols, and as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, it is in a non-time saving gaming state (that is, that is). The first determination table 116a referred to during the normal game state), the special game, and the small hit game, and the second determination referred to during the first time-saving game state (that is, during the first low-probability time-saving game state). A table 116b and a third determination table 116c referred to during the second time-saving game state (that is, during the second low-probability time-saving game state or during the high-probability time-saving game state) are provided.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, one hit determination random number is acquired within the numerical range of 0 to 65535. Then, if the game state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the non-time saving gaming state, or if the time of drawing the normal symbol is during the special game or the small hit game, the first determination table 116a is selected. Then, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected first determination table 116a. Further, if the gaming state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the first time-saving gaming state, the second determination table 116b is selected, and based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected second determination table 116b. A lottery of ordinary symbols is held. Further, if the gaming state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the second time-saving gaming state, the third determination table 116c is selected, and based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected third determination table 116c. A lottery of ordinary symbols is held.

As shown in FIG. 12A, according to the first determination table 116a, when the hit determination random number is 1, it is determined to be a hit, and when it is any other hit determination random number (0,2 to 65535). It is judged to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in the first determination table 116a is 1/65536.
Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, according to the second determination table 116b, when the hit determination random number is 1 to 5, it is determined to be a hit, and other hit determination random numbers (0, 6 to 65535). If it is, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in the second determination table 116b is 5/65536.
Further, as shown in FIG. 12 (c), according to the third determination table 116c, when the hit determination random number is 1 to 65500, it is determined to be a hit, and other hit determination random numbers (0, 65501 to 65535). If it is, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in the third determination table 116c is about 99/100.
If a winning symbol is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, the winning symbol is determined, and if it is lost, the lost symbol is determined.

Further, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment has the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table 117 and the second start winning opening open as a table for determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol and controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b. The control table 118 is provided.

The ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table 117 is for determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. As described above, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed by the game ball passing through the gate 20, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table 117.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, when the gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state, or during a special game or a small hit game, a normal symbol having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set. The fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined, and when the gaming state is the first time-shortening gaming state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol in which the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set is determined, and when the gaming state is the second time-shortening gaming state, , The fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol with the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is determined. Then, when the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 (see FIG. 3) blinks and displays during the fluctuation time set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol. Then, when the winning symbol is determined by the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol display device 32 lights up, and when the lost symbol is determined due to the loss, the ordinary symbol display device 32 is turned on. Turns off.
In the present specification, the blinking display of the normal symbol display device 32 is "variation of the normal symbol", the lighting or extinguishing of the normal symbol display device 32 is the "stop display of the normal symbol", and the "stop of the fluctuation of the normal symbol". , "Stop the fluctuation of ordinary symbols", etc.

Further, the second start winning opening opening control table 118 is referred to for controlling the operation of the movable piece 16b provided in the second starting winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the normal symbol display device 32 is turned on, the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 opens and closes in the manner specified in the second starting winning opening opening control table 118. ing. Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state, or during a special game or a small hit game, as shown in FIG. 14, the starting winning opening solenoid 16c is set to 0.05 seconds (= 0.05). Since the power is turned on (seconds x 1 time), the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 is opened for 0.05 seconds. Further, when the gaming state is the first time-shortening gaming state, as shown in FIG. 14, the start winning opening solenoid 16c is energized for 0.2 seconds (= 0.2 seconds × 1 time), so that the second start is performed. The movable piece 16b of the winning opening 16 is opened for 0.2 seconds. Further, when the game state is the second short game state, as shown in FIG. 14, the start winning opening solenoid 16c is energized for 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds × 2 times), so that the second start is performed. The movable piece 16b of the winning opening 16 is opened for a total of 1.8 seconds.

As described above, the conditions for opening and closing the second start winning opening 16 are defined for each of the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, and according to the contents of these conditions, the time-saving game state is the first. Since the 2 start winning opening 16 is easily maintained in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the 2nd starting winning opening 16 than in the non-time saving game state.
Further, in the first time-saving game state of the time-saving game state, the second start winning opening 16 is more likely to be maintained in the open state than in the non-time-saving game state, but compared to the second time-saving game state of the time-saving game state. It is difficult for the second starting winning opening 16 to be maintained in the open state. That is, during the first time-saving game state, it is easier to enter the second start winning opening 16 than during the non-time-saving game state, and during the second time-saving game state, the second start winning opening is easier than during the first time-saving game state. It is easy to enter the ball 16. Therefore, during the second time-saving game state, the decrease in the number of game balls with the progress of the game is suppressed as compared with the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state, and during the first time-saving game state, as compared with the non-time-saving game state. However, you will be able to get a chance to win a big hit lottery.

When the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, as described above, the second determination table 116b and the third determination table 116c are used as processes for facilitating the maintenance of the second start winning opening 16 in the open state. Lottery of ordinary symbols by (hit determination random number judgment table 116 set to have a higher probability of winning than the non-short game state), fluctuation time for the first time-short game state and fluctuation time for the second time-short game state (non-time-short game state) (Fluctuating time shorter than the time-saving game state) is determined, and the opening pattern for the first time-saving game state and the opening pattern for the second time-saving game state (opening pattern with a longer total opening time than the non-time-saving game state) Although all of the control has been performed, the control is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the above-mentioned processes may be performed.

(Outline of processing in pachinko machine P)
Next, an outline of the processing executed on the main control board 100 with the progress of the above-mentioned special figure game, lottery of time-saving symbols, normal figure game, and special game will be described with reference to a flowchart.
First, the main processing of the main control board 100 will be described.
When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101, and the main CPU 101 executes the main process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

In step 100, as an initialization process, the main CPU 101 reads a start program from the main ROM 102 in response to a power-on, initializes a flag stored in the main RAM 103, and transmits various types to the sub-control board 300. The command is stored in the production transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 101.
In step 101, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number that is referred to when updating the special symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the special symbol random number is for determining the initial value of the special symbol random number. That is, the special symbol random number is updated with the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at the time of starting the update as the initial value. Then, when one round of this random number range is performed, the update of the special symbol random number is continued with the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at that time as the initial value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 102.

In step 102, the main CPU 101 updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the processing of step 102 is completed, the processing of step 101 and step 102 is repeatedly executed until the predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described.
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 100 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment), which is shown in the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed.

In step 200, the main CPU 101 executes a timer update process for updating various timer counters. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 201.
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a subtraction timer, and the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 is executed, and the subtraction is stopped when it reaches 0. It has become.
In step 201, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding "1", and when the added result exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" and the random number counter makes one round. Updates the random number from the value of the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at that time. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 202.

In step 202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an input to the gate detection sensor 20a, the first start winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the specific area detection sensor 57a, and based on this, Performs a sensor detection process that performs a predetermined process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 203.
In step 203, the main CPU 101 executes special figure and time saving symbol related control processing for controlling the special figure game, the lottery of the time saving symbol, the special game and the small hit game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 204.

In step 204, the main CPU 101 executes a normal map-related control process for controlling the normal map game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 205.
In step 205, the main CPU 101 executes error-related processing for controlling the occurrence and cancellation of various errors. Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives a door opening command based on the opening of the front door 3 or a saucer full tank command based on the full tank state of the saucer 7, the main CPU 101 specifies a corresponding error. A command (for example, a door opening command, a saucer full tank command, etc.) is generated and stored (set) in the production transmission data storage area. Further, when the main control board 100 no longer receives the above command, the main CPU 101 generates a corresponding error release designation command (for example, a door closing command, a full tank release command, etc.) and stores the transmission data for production. Store in the area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 206.

In step 206, when the detection signals from the general winning opening detection sensor 14a, the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the large winning opening detection sensor 18a are input to the main CPU 101, the said The main CPU 101 updates the prize ball counter provided corresponding to each detection signal, and transmits a payout number designation command corresponding to each detection signal to the firing payout control board 200. When the prize ball is paid out by the launch payout control board 200, a payout command is transmitted to the main control board 100 for each payout, and when the main CPU 101 receives the payout command, the prize ball counter is subtracted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 207.
In step 207, the main CPU 101 has external information data for outputting the game state of the pachinko machine P to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and start winning opening solenoid data for opening and closing the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16. , Large winning opening solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 18, various display devices (first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, ordinary symbol display device 32, time saving symbol display device 34, Creation of display data and the like of the first special figure hold display device 38, the second special figure hold display device 39, and the ordinary symbol hold display device 33) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 208.

In step 208, the main CPU 101 performs output control processing such as port output for outputting signals of each data created in step 207 described above and command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the transmission data storage area for production. To execute. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 is completed.

Next, the sensor detection processing in step 202 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 300, the main CPU 101 executes a gate detection time process for drawing a lottery of ordinary symbols based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 20. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 301.
In step 301, the main CPU 101 executes the first start winning opening detection processing for performing a big hit lottery and a time-saving symbol lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting winning opening 15. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 302.

In step 302, the main CPU 101 executes a second start winning opening detection process for performing a big hit lottery and a time-saving symbol lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting winning opening 16. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 303.
In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a specific area detection time process for performing a predetermined process based on the game ball entering the specific area 57. Then, the sensor detection processing is terminated.

Next, the gate detection processing in step 300 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 400, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has not been input, the gate detection processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 401.
In step 401, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter (that is, the current number of normal figure hold numbers) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the gate detection processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than 4, the process proceeds to the next step 402.

In step 402, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the normal figure hold number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 403.
In step 403, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning determination random number, stores it in the normal figure hold storage area, and ends the gate detection processing.

Next, the process at the time of detecting the first start winning opening in step 301 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 500, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start winning opening detection sensor 15a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the first start winning opening detection sensor 15a is not input, the processing at the time of detecting the first starting winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the first start winning opening detection sensor 15a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 501.
In step 501, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the first hold number counter (that is, the first hold number at the present time) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the first start winning opening detection processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 502.

In step 502, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first hold number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 503.
In step 503, the main CPU 101 acquires the jackpot random number and stores it in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 504.

In step 504, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in the above-mentioned step 201 and stores it in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area in which the jackpot random number is stored in the above-mentioned step 503. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 505.
In step 505, the main CPU 101 acquires the variation pattern random number updated in the above-mentioned step 102, and stores it in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area in which the jackpot random number is stored in the above-mentioned step 503. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 506.

In step 506, the main CPU 101 acquires the time-saving symbol random number and stores it in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area in which the jackpot random number is stored in step 503 described above. From the above, the acquired jackpot random numbers, special symbol random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, and time-saving symbol random numbers are all stored in the same storage unit of the first reserved storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 507.
In step 507, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the first special figure random number and the first time saving symbol random number are stored and stores them in the transmission data storage area for effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 508.

In step 508, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state or the first time saving gaming state. Then, when it is determined that neither the non-time-saving game state nor the first time-saving game state (that is, the second time-saving game state) is determined, the processing at the time of detecting the first start winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the non-time saving game state or the first time saving game state, the process proceeds to the next step 509.
In step 509, the main CPU 101 uses the stored first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number before the start of fluctuation based on the first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number (first special symbol random number and first time-saving symbol random number). 1. When the time-saving symbol random number is acquired (stored as a hold), a pre-judgment process for performing various determinations regarding the jackpot lottery and the time-saving symbol lottery is executed. Then, the processing at the time of detecting the first start winning opening is completed.

Next, the process at the time of detecting the second start winning opening in step 302 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 600, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start winning opening detection sensor 16a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second start winning opening detection sensor 16a has not been input, the processing at the time of detecting the second starting winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the second start winning opening detection sensor 16a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 601.
In step 601 the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the second hold number counter (that is, the second hold number at the present time) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the processing at the time of detecting the second start winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 602.

In step 602, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second hold number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 603.
In step 603, the main CPU 101 acquires the jackpot random number and stores it in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 604.

In step 604, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in the above-mentioned step 201, and stores it in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area in which the jackpot random number is stored in the above-mentioned step 603. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 605.
In step 605, the main CPU 101 acquires the variation pattern random number updated in the above-mentioned step 102, and stores it in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area in which the jackpot random number is stored in the above-mentioned step 603. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 606.

In step 606, the main CPU 101 acquires the time-saving symbol random number and stores it in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area in which the jackpot random number is stored in step 603 described above. From the above, the acquired jackpot random numbers, special symbol random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, and time-saving symbol random numbers are all stored in the same storage unit of the second reserved storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 607.
In step 607, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the second special figure random number and the second time saving symbol random number are stored and stores them in the transmission data storage area for effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 608.

In step 608, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. Then, when it is determined that the game is not in the second time-saving game state (that is, it is in the non-time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state), the processing at the time of detecting the second start winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the second short game state, the process proceeds to the next step 609.
In step 609, the main CPU 101 uses the stored second special symbol random number and the second time-saving symbol random number before the start of fluctuation based on the second special symbol random number and the second time-saving symbol random number (the second special symbol random number and the second 2 When the time-saving symbol random number is acquired (stored as a hold), a pre-judgment process for performing various determinations regarding the jackpot lottery is executed. Then, the processing at the time of detecting the second start winning opening is completed.

Next, the pre-determination processing of steps 509 and 609 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the pre-determination process of step 509 described above, the following is based on the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, the variable pattern random number, the time saving symbol random number, and the first reserved number stored in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area. In the pre-determination process of step 609 described above, the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, the variable pattern random number, the time saving symbol random number, and the second reserved number stored in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area are executed. The following processing is executed based on.
In step 650, the main CPU 101 determines the type of start winning opening (1st starting winning opening 15, 2nd starting winning opening 16), the number of holds (first hold number, 2nd hold number), and the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number). , Check the gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-saving gaming state, second low-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability time-saving gaming state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 651.
In step 651, the main CPU 101 executes a time saving symbol determination process for determining the type of the time saving symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning opening where the game ball enters in the normal game state is the first starting winning opening 15 (first time-saving symbol random number), the first time-saving symbol random number determination table 112a is acquired. , The type of the time saving symbol (time saving symbol J1, J2) is determined based on the table and the stored time saving symbol random number (first time saving symbol random number). Further, when the starting winning opening in which the game ball enters in the normal game state is the second starting winning opening 16 (second time-saving symbol random number), the second time-saving symbol random number determination table 112b is acquired and the table is obtained. And the stored time-saving symbol random number (second time-saving symbol random number), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J2) is determined. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, it is determined that the type of the time saving symbol is the time saving symbol J2. Then, the data related to the result of the determination (type of time saving symbol) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 652.

In step 652, the main CPU 101 acquires one of the jackpot random number determination tables 110 corresponding to the gaming state confirmed in step 650 (low probability determination table 110a, high probability determination table 110b), and the acquired table. And, based on the stored jackpot random number, the jackpot determination process for determining the result of the jackpot lottery is executed. After that, the data related to the result of the determination (big hit, small hit or loss) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 653.
In step 653, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning opening where the game ball enters is the first starting winning opening 15 (first special figure random number), the first starting winning opening determination table 111a is acquired, and the table and the table are obtained. , The type of jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X1, X2, X3), the type of small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1, Y2), or the type of lost symbol (missing symbol Z1) based on the stored special symbol random number. , Z2) is determined. Further, when the starting winning opening where the game ball enters is the second starting winning opening 16 (second special figure random number), the second starting winning opening determination table 111b is acquired and stored as the table. Based on the special symbol random number, the type of jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X1, X4), the type of small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1, Y2), or the type of lost symbol (missing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. To do. Then, the data related to the result of the determination (type of special symbol) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 654.

In step 654, the main CPU 101 satisfies the game state confirmed in step 650, the type of start winning opening into which the game ball has entered, and the above condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times). The variation pattern table 115 corresponding to the possibility is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 655.
In step 655, the main CPU 101 fluctuates based on the type of time saving symbol determined in step 651 described above, the type of special symbol determined in step 652 described above, the number of holds, and the stored variation pattern random number. The variable pattern command judgment process for judging the pattern command is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 656.

In step 656, the main CPU 101 determines the type of the time saving symbol determined in step 651, the type of the special symbol determined in step 653 as a result of the jackpot lottery determined in step 652, and the above. The pre-determination command including the variation pattern command determined in step 655 is stored in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the pre-determination process is terminated.
By the above processing, the type of time-saving symbol determined at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol for the first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number, or the second special symbol random number and the second time-saving symbol random number stored as hold. As a result of the jackpot lottery, the type of special symbol and the variation pattern command are transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in advance (that is, before the start of variation) at the time of acquisition of the random number by the pre-determination command.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the above-mentioned pre-determination process, the pachinko machine P is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 and stored in the hold storage area (first hold storage area). Random numbers (first special figure random numbers, first time-saving symbol random numbers) or random numbers acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 and stored in the hold storage area (second hold storage area). (2nd special figure random number, 2nd time saving symbol random number) has been determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pre-determination process, the random numbers stored in the reserved storage area may be determined instead of directly determining the random numbers stored in another storage area (for example, a register or the like).

Next, the process at the time of detecting a specific area in step 303 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 670, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a special game is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the special game is not in progress, the processing at the time of detecting a specific area is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special game is in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 671.
In step 671, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has not been input a predetermined number of times, the processing at the time of detecting the specific area is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times, the process proceeds to the next step 672.
In step 672, the main CPU 101 turns on the entry flag indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the specific area 57. Then, the processing at the time of detecting a specific area is terminated.

Next, the special figure and the time saving symbol-related control process in step 203 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.
In step 700, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the execution phase data. This execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) constituting the special figure and the time-saving symbol-related control process is to be executed. Specifically, this execution phase data indicates data “00” indicating the execution of the fluctuation start processing described later, data “01” indicating the execution of the fluctuation stop processing described later, and execution of the post-stop processing described later. Data "02", data "03" indicating the execution of the special game control process described later, data "04" indicating the execution of the small hit game control process described later, and data indicating the execution of the special game end process described later. It has "05" and.
Then, based on the value of the execution phase data loaded in step 700 described above, the main CPU 101 performs fluctuation start processing (step 701), fluctuation stop processing (step 702), post-stop processing (step 703), and special game control processing (step 703). Either step 704), the small hit game control process (step 705), or the special game end process (step 706) is executed. Then, the special figure and the time saving symbol related control process are terminated.

Next, the fluctuation start processing of step 701 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.
In step 800, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “00” indicating the execution of the variation start process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is "00", the process proceeds to the next step 801. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is not "00", the fluctuation start process is terminated.
In step 801 the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special figure random number and the second time-saving symbol random number are stored in the storage unit of the second hold storage area, that is, the second hold number counter is "1" or more. Judge whether or not. Then, when it is determined that the second special figure random number and the second time saving symbol random number are stored, the process proceeds to step 804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special figure random number and the second time saving symbol random number are not stored, the process proceeds to the next step 802.

In step 802, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special figure random number and the first time-saving symbol random number are stored in the storage unit of the first hold storage area, that is, the first hold number counter is "1" or more. Judge whether or not. Then, when it is determined that the first special figure random number and the first time saving symbol random number are not stored, the process proceeds to step 813. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special figure random number and the first time saving symbol random number are stored, the process proceeds to the next step 803.
In step 803, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first hold number counter by "1" and executes the shift process of the first hold storage area. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage unit of the first reserved storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the second storage unit of the first reserved storage area is stored. ~ Each random number stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit having a smaller number. As a result, each random number stored in the first hold storage area is a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO), and is used for a jackpot determination process and a time-saving symbol lottery process, which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.

Further, in step 804 which proceeds when it is determined that the second special figure random number and the second time saving symbol random number are stored in the above step 801 the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second hold number counter by "1". At the same time, the shift processing of the second reserved storage area is executed. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage unit of the second reserved storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the second storage unit of the second reserved storage area is stored. ~ Each random number stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit having a smaller number. As a result, each random number stored in the second hold storage area is a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO), and is used for a jackpot determination process and a time-saving symbol lottery process, which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.
In step 805, the main CPU 101 increments the count value of the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of executions of the jackpot lottery (that is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 stores the fluctuation number command including the count value of the fluctuation number counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the fluctuation count command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 can grasp the count value of the current fluctuation count counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 806.

In step 806, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving symbol lottery process for determining the type of time-saving symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning opening where the game ball enters in the normal game state is the first starting winning opening 15 (first time-saving symbol random number), the first time-saving symbol random number determination table 112a is acquired. , The type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J1, J2) is determined based on the table and the time-saving symbol random number (first time-saving symbol random number) stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. .. Further, when the starting winning opening in which the game ball enters in the normal game state is the second starting winning opening 16 (second time-saving symbol random number), the second time-saving symbol random number determination table 112b is acquired and the table is obtained. The type of the time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J2) is determined based on the time-saving symbol random number (second time-saving symbol random number) stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Further, in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, regardless of whether the starting winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 into which the game ball has entered is the first starting winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, the time-saving symbol lottery process is performed here. Without doing so, the time saving symbol J2 is forcibly determined. Then, the data related to the determined time saving symbol is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 807.
In step 807, the main CPU 101 acquires any of the jackpot random number determination tables 110 (low probability determination table 110a, high probability determination table 110b) corresponding to the current gaming state, and the acquired tables and the above-mentioned step 803. Alternatively, the jackpot determination process for deriving the result of the jackpot lottery is executed based on the jackpot random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 804. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 808.

In step 808, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning opening where the game ball enters is the first starting winning opening 15 (first special figure random number), the first starting winning opening determination table 111a is acquired, and the table and the table are obtained. , The type of big hit symbol (big hit symbol X1, X2, X3), the type of small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1,) based on the special symbol random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Y2) or the type of the lost symbol (missing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Further, when the starting winning opening in which the game ball enters is the second starting winning opening 16 (second special figure random number), the second starting winning opening determination table 111b is acquired, and the table and the above-mentioned table are obtained. Based on the special symbol random numbers stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804, the type of jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X1, X4), the type of small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1, Y2), or The type of the lost symbol (missing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Then, the data corresponding to the determined special symbol is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. Further, in this special symbol determination process, the current gaming state, that is, the gaming state at the time when the special symbol is determined is stored in the gaming state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 809.
In the fluctuation start processing of the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when both the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are stored, the second special figure has priority over the first special figure random number. Random numbers are processed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and random numbers may be processed in the order in which they are stored in the reserved storage area.

In step 809, the main CPU 101 stores in the effect transmission data storage area a symbol determination command indicating the type of the time saving symbol determined in step 806 and the type of the special symbol determined in step 808. .. As a result, the determined time-saving symbol type and information related to the time-saving symbol type are transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of fluctuation. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 810.

In step 810, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern based on the variation pattern random numbers stored in the processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 811.

In step 811 the main CPU 101 uses the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 to start the variable display of the special symbol, and the time-saving symbol display device 34 to change the time-saving symbol. Set the time-saving symbol variation display data to start the display. As a result, when the special symbol is variablely displayed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol display device 30 starts blinking display, and the special symbol is displayed based on the second special symbol random number. When the variable display is performed, the second special symbol display device 31 starts blinking display. Along with this, the time saving symbol display device 34 starts blinking display. Here, the blinking display means that "-" blinks at predetermined intervals in each display device.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the first special figure random number and the first time-saving symbol random number are stored in the first hold storage area, the first special figure can recognize the first hold number. When the hold display device 38 is displayed and the second special figure random number and the second time-saving symbol random number are stored in the second hold storage area, the second special figure hold display device can recognize the second hold number. 39 is displayed. Then, when the above-mentioned variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the random number of the first special figure, the first special figure is held so as to indicate that the number of the first reserved is reduced by one at the same time as the start of the variable display. When the display device 38 is display-controlled and the variation display of the above-mentioned special symbol is performed based on the second special symbol random number, it is indicated that the number of the second hold is reduced by one at the same time as the start of the variation display. , The display control of the second special figure hold display device 39 is performed.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 812.

In step 812, the main CPU 101 sets "01" in the execution phase data so that the fluctuation stop processing is executed in the special figure and the time saving symbol related control processing, and ends the fluctuation start processing.
Further, in step 813, which proceeds when it is determined in step 802 described above that the first special figure random number and the first time-saving symbol random number are not stored in the first reserved storage area, the main CPU 101 is not displayed for fluctuation. Based on this, the effect display device 21 executes the customer waiting determination process for performing the customer waiting display. Specifically, the main CPU 101 clocks the time during which the special symbol and the time-saving symbol are not displayed in a variable manner, and waits for a predetermined customer (for example, 30 seconds) without displaying the special symbol and the time-saving symbol in a variable manner. ) Elapses, assuming that the customer waiting state has been reached, the customer waiting command for displaying the customer waiting screen on the effect display device 21 is stored in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the special fluctuation start process is terminated.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process of step 810 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 900, the main CPU 101 determines the type of start winning opening (1st starting winning opening 15, 2nd starting winning opening 16), the number of holds (1st hold number, 2nd hold number), and the game. Check the states (normal game state, first low-probability time-saving game state, second low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 901.
In step 901, the main CPU 101 satisfies the game state confirmed in step 650, the type of start winning opening into which the game ball has entered, and the above condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number). The variation pattern table 115 corresponding to the possibility is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 902.

In step 902, the main CPU 101 includes the variation pattern table 115 acquired in step 901, the type of the time saving symbol determined in step 806, the type of the special symbol determined in step 808, and the above. A variation pattern command is determined based on the number of holds confirmed in step 900 of the above and the variation pattern random number stored in the processing area in step 803 or 804 described above, and the determined variation pattern command is used in a predetermined processing area. Remember in. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 903.
In step 903, the main CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command determined in step 902 above in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 904.

In step 904, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time associated with the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern table 115. Then, the determined fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time timer counter. Then, the fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated.

Next, the fluctuation stop processing of step 702 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1000, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “01” indicating the execution of the fluctuation stop processing. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "01", the fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "01", the process proceeds to the next step 1001.

In step 1001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time timer counter in step 904 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1002.
In step 1002, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the special symbol determined in step 808 on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, and sets the special symbol. Executes the stop display of. Along with this, the time-saving symbol stop display data for stopping and displaying the time-saving symbol determined in step 806 is set in the time-saving symbol display device 34, and the time-saving symbol stop display is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1003.

In step 1003, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol and the time saving symbol have been determined in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1004.
In step 1004, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display time for stopping and displaying the special symbol and the time saving symbol in the stop display time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1005.

In step 1005, the main CPU 101 sets "02" in the execution phase data so that the post-stop processing is executed in the special figure and the time saving symbol related control processing. Then, the fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing of step 703 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.
In step 1100, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “02” indicating the execution of the post-stop processing. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "02", the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "02", the process proceeds to the next step 1101.
In step 1101, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop display time set in the stop display time timer counter in step 1004 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1102.

In step 1102, the main CPU 101 stores a stop display end command indicating that the stop display time has elapsed in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the fact that the stop display time has elapsed is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, the main CPU 101 stores the current gaming state in the gaming state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1103.
In step 1103, the main CPU 101 executes the time saving update process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a first time-saving game flag indicating that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, or a second time-saving gaming state indicating that the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. Determine if any of the game flags are on. Then, when it is determined that the first time saving game flag or the second time saving game flag is turned on, the time saving number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. In this time saving number storage area, the remaining number of fluctuations until the time saving game state ends is stored. Then, the remaining number of fluctuations memorized is decremented by "1". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" due to the update of the remaining number of fluctuations, the process of turning off the first time-saving game flag or the second time-saving game flag that has been turned on is also executed. Further, when it is determined that neither the first time saving game flag nor the second time saving game flag is turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1104.

In step 1104, the main CPU 101 performs a high-accuracy number-of-times update process. Here, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game flag indicating that the current game state is the high-probability game state is turned on. Then, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is turned on, the high probability number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. In this high-probability number storage area, the remaining number of fluctuations until the high-probability gaming state ends is stored. Then, the remaining number of fluctuations memorized is decremented by "1". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" due to the update of the remaining number of fluctuations, the process of turning off the high probability game flag is also executed. Further, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1105.

In step 1105, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is not a big hit symbol (that is, a small hit symbol or a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1106.
In step 1106, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot winning command for transmitting the game state at the time of jackpot winning and the type of jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X1, X2, X3, X4) displayed as a stop to the sub-control board 300. To do. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1107.

In step 1107, the main CPU 101 resets the current gaming state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1108.
In step 1108, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and issues an opening command indicating that the opening process is started in the transmission data storage area for effect. Remember in. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1109.

In step 1109, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "10" as the number of rounds if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X1 or X2, and rounds if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X3 or X4. Set "4" as the number. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1110.
In step 1110, the main CPU 101 sets "03" in the execution phase data so that the special game control process is executed in the special figure and the time saving symbol related control process. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Further, in step 1111 which proceeds when it is determined that the special symbol stopped and displayed in step 1105 is not a big hit symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a small hit symbol. To do. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is not a small hit symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 1114. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is a small hit symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1112.
In step 1112, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the small hit game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores the opening command indicating that the opening process is started for the effect transmission data. Store in the area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1113.

In step 1113, the main CPU 101 sets "04" in the execution phase data so that the small hit game control process is executed in the special figure and the time saving symbol related control process. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Further, in step 1114, which proceeds when it is determined that the special symbol stopped and displayed in step 1111 is not a small hit symbol, the main CPU 101 has a normal gaming state at the time of the big hit lottery, and the time saving symbol. Determine if J1 has been determined. Then, when it is determined that the time saving symbol J2 is determined in a state other than the normal gaming state or in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step 1116. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the normal game state and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, the process proceeds to the next step 1115.
In step 1115, the main CPU 101 executes the first low-probability time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to the first low-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, the first time saving game flag is turned on, and "20" is set for the number of time saving games. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1116.

In step 1116, the main CPU 101 confirms the set game state, and stores the game state command indicating the game state in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1117.
In step 1117, the main CPU 101 sets "00" in the execution phase data so that the variation start process is executed in the special figure and the time saving symbol related control process. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the special game control process of step 704 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.
In step 1200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “03” indicating the execution of the special game control process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "03", the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "03", the process proceeds to the next step 1201.
In step 1201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1108 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1202.

In step 1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending process, which is a standby process performed after all round games are completed in this special game control process, is in progress. Then, if it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process proceeds to step 1210. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 1203.
In step 1203, the main CPU 101 opens and closes the special winning opening 18 and operates the sorting member 59 based on the special electric accessory operating table 113 according to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. To execute. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1204.

In step 1204, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the time when the round game is started based on the large winning opening opening / closing control of step 1203 described above. Then, if it is determined that the round game has not started, the process proceeds to step 1206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game has started, the process proceeds to the next step 1205.
In step 1205, the main CPU 101 stores a round game start command indicating the start of the round game in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1206.
The round game start command is provided for each number of round games, so that the number of round games started can be transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

In step 1206, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the round game is completed based on the large winning opening opening / closing control of step 1203 described above. Then, when it is determined that the round game has not ended, the special game control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game is completed, the process proceeds to the next step 1207.
In step 1207, the main CPU 101 decrements the number of rounds stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1208.

In step 1208, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of rounds decremented in step 1207 described above is "0". Then, when it is determined that the number of rounds is not "0", the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of rounds is "0", the process proceeds to the next step 1209.
In step 1209, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the special game, in the ending time timer counter, and sends an ending command indicating that the ending process is started to the effect transmission data storage area. Remember. Then, the special game control process is terminated.

Further, in step 1210, which proceeds when it is determined that the ending process is in progress in step 1202 described above, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1209 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1211.
In step 1211, the main CPU 101 stores a special game end command indicating that the special game has ended in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1212.

In step 1212, the main CPU 101 sets "05" in the execution phase data so that the special game end process is executed in the special figure and the time saving symbol related control process. Then, the special game control process is terminated.

Next, the small hit game control process in step 705 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.
In step 1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “04” indicating the execution of the small hit game control process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "04", the small hit game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "04", the process proceeds to the next step 1251.
In step 1251, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1112 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1252.

In step 1252, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending process, which is the standby process performed after the opening and closing of the big winning opening 18 is completed in the small hit game control process, is in progress. Then, if it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process proceeds to step 1256. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 1253.
In step 1253, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit game execution process for opening and closing the large winning opening 18 based on the fourth operating table 113d in the special electric accessory operating table 113. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1254.

In step 1254, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening and closing of the large winning opening 18 is completed. Then, when it is determined that the opening and closing of the large winning opening 18 has not been completed, the small hit game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening and closing of the large winning opening 18 is completed, the process proceeds to the next step 1255.
In step 1255, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the small hit game, in the ending time timer counter, and issues an ending command indicating that the ending process is started in the transmission data storage area for effect. Remember in. Then, the small hit game control process is terminated.

Further, in step 1256, which proceeds when it is determined that the ending process is in progress in step 1252 described above, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1255 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the small hit game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1257.
In step 1257, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game end process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1258.
In step 1258, the main CPU 101 confirms the set game state, and stores the game state command indicating the game state in the production transmission data storage area. Further, the main CPU 101 sets "00" in the execution phase data so that the variation processing is executed in the special figure and the time saving symbol related control processing. Then, the small hit game control process is terminated.

Next, the small hit game end process of step 1257 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1280, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state at the time of the big hit lottery is the normal gaming state and the time saving symbol J1 is determined. Then, when it is determined that the time saving symbol J2 is determined in a state other than the normal game state or in the normal game state, the small hit game end process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the normal game state and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, the process proceeds to the next step 1281.
In step 1281, the main CPU 101 executes the first low-probability time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to the first low-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, the first time saving game flag is turned on, and "20" is set for the number of time saving games. Then, the small hit game end process is completed.

Next, the special game end process of step 705 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1300, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “05” indicating the execution of the special game end process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "05", the special game end process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "05", the process proceeds to the next step 1301.
In step 1301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the entry flag is on. Then, if it is determined that the entry flag is not on (that is, it is off), the process proceeds to step 1309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entry flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1302.

In step 1302, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter for counting the continuous probability variation setting count, and the value of the continuous time reduction setting counter for counting the continuous time reduction setting number. 1 decrement. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1303.
In step 1303, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter has reached 0, that is, whether or not the continuous probability variation setting number has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times. Then, when it is determined that the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step 1305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 1304.

In step 1304, the main CPU 101 executes a low-probability game state setting process for setting the game state to the low-probability game state. Specifically, the high-probability game flag is turned off. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined upper limit number of times "10000" in the continuous probability variation setting number counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 1306.
Further, in step 1305, which proceeds when it is determined that the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter has not reached 0 in step 1303 described above, the high probability game state setting process for setting the game state to the high probability game state is executed. .. Specifically, the high-accuracy game flag is turned on, and "10000" is set for the high-accuracy number of times. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1306.

In step 1306, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the continuous time reduction setting number counter has reached 0, that is, whether or not the continuous time reduction setting number has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times. Then, when it is determined that the value of the continuous time reduction setting number counter has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step 1308. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous time reduction setting number counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 1307.
In step 1307, the main CPU 101 executes a non-time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to the non-time-saving game state. Specifically, the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are turned off. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined upper limit number of times "10000" in the continuous time reduction setting number counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.

Further, in step 1308, which proceeds when it is determined in step 1306 that the value of the continuous time reduction setting number counter has not reached 0, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the second time reduction game state. Execute the status setting process. Specifically, the second time saving game flag is turned on, and "10000" is set for the number of time saving games. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.
Further, in step 1309 which proceeds when it is determined that the entry flag is not turned on in step 1301 described above, the main CPU 101 executes the same low-probability time-saving game state setting process as in step 1304 described above, and also counts the number of continuous probability variation settings. Is set to "10000", which is a predetermined upper limit number of times. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1310.

In step 1310, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving / non-time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to the non-time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot is X2 or X3, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state), the second time-saving gaming state is set. In order to set it, the second time saving game flag is turned on and "10000" is set for the number of time saving games. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the non-time saving game state, the first time saving game flag and the second time saving game flag are turned off in order to set the non-time saving game state. If the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot is X4, the second time-saving game flag is turned on and "100" is set for the number of time-saving games in order to set the second time-saving game state. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.
In step 1311, the set gaming state is the high-probability time-saving gaming state (high-probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state) or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state). ) Is one of the following. Then, if it is determined that neither is the case, the process proceeds to step 1313. On the other hand, if it is determined to be any of the above, the process proceeds to the next step 1312.

In step 1312, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the continuous jackpot count counter for counting the number of consecutive jackpots by one. When the value of the continuous jackpot count counter reaches a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the above condition is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step 1314.
Further, in step 1313, which proceeds when it is determined that the gaming state set in step 1311 is neither a high-probability time-saving gaming state nor a second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101 is set to the value of the continuous jackpot count counter. Is reset (zero clear). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1314.

In step 1314, the main CPU 101 turns off the entry flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1315.
In step 1315, the main CPU 101 sets the game state designation command in the production transmission data storage area according to the game state set as described above. This game state specification command includes information on turning on or off the high-probability game flag, information on turning on or off the first time-saving game flag, and information on turning on or off the second time-saving game flag, which are set as described above. , High accuracy count, time saving count information is included. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1316.

In step 1316, the main CPU 101 sets "00" in the execution phase data so that the variation start process is executed in the special figure and the time saving symbol related control process. Then, the special game end process is completed.

Next, the normal diagram-related control process in step 204 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.
In step 1400, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the normal diagram execution phase data. This normal map execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) constituting the normal figure related control process is to be executed. Specifically, the normal symbol execution phase data includes data "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation start processing described later, data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing described later, and ordinary data "11" described later. It has data "12" indicating the execution of the pattern stop post-processing and data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control process described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (step 1401), the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing (step 1402), and the normal symbol stop post-processing (step) based on the value of the normal symbol execution phase data loaded in step 1400 described above. Either 1403) or the movable piece control process (step 1404) is executed. Then, the control process related to the normal figure is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing in step 1401 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.
In step 1500, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol execution phase data is "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol variation start process. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "10", the normal symbol variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal map execution phase data is "10", the process proceeds to the next step 1501.
In step 1501, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determined random number is stored in the normal figure hold storage area, that is, whether or not the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols counter is not "1" or more (that is, "0"), the normal symbol variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved numbers counter is "1" or more, the process proceeds to the next step 1502.

In step 1502, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the normal figure hold number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1503.
In step 1503, the main CPU 101 executes the shift process of the normal figure hold storage area. Specifically, the hit determination random number stored in the first storage unit is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the hit determination random number stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored. The determined random number is shifted to a storage unit having a smaller number. As a result, the winning determination random number stored in the normal figure hold storage area is a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO), and is used in the winning determination process described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 1504.

In step 1504, the main CPU 101 uses the hit determination random number determination table 116 (first) corresponding to the current state (non-time saving game state, first time saving game state, second time saving game state, special game, small hit game). The determination table 116a, the second determination table 116b, or the third determination table 116c) is selected, and the normal symbol is based on the selected table and the winning determination random number stored in the processing area in step 1503 described above. The winning determination process for deriving the result of the lottery is executed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the first determination table 116a during the non-time saving game state, during the special game, or during the small hit game, and when it is in the first time saving game state, the main CPU 101 refers to the first determination table 116a. The second determination table 116b is referred to, and when the second time saving game state is in progress, the third determination table 116c is referred to to determine the winning determination random number stored in the processing area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1505.
In step 1505, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the winning determination process in step 1504 described above is a hit. Then, if it is determined to be a hit, the process proceeds to the next step 1506. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit (that is, loss), the process proceeds to step 1507.

In step 1506, the main CPU 101 stores the winning symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to step 1508.
Further, in step 1507, which proceeds when it is determined in step 1505 that the result of the winning determination process is not a hit (that is, loss), the main CPU 101 stores the loss symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1508.

In step 1508, the main CPU 101 confirms whether the current state is the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the special game, or the small hit game, and changes the normal symbol. With reference to the pattern determination table 117, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol according to the current state is set in the normal symbol fluctuation time timer counter. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 is in the non-time saving game state, the special game, or the small hit game, the main CPU 101 sets "3 seconds" in the normal figure fluctuation time counter, and is in the first time saving game state. In some cases, "2 seconds" is set in the normal figure fluctuation time counter, and "0.6 seconds" is set in the normal figure fluctuation time counter in the second time-shortening game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1509.
In step 1509, the main CPU 101 sets the variation display data for starting the variation display of the normal symbol. As a result, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol display device 32 starts the blinking display. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the hit determination random number is stored in the normal figure hold storage area, the normal symbol hold display device 33 is displayed in such a manner that the number of normal figure hold can be recognized. It has become. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is performed, the display control of the normal symbol hold display device 33 is performed so as to indicate that the number of reserved symbols is reduced by one at the same time as the start of the variation display. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1510.

In step 1510, the main CPU 101 stores the current state of the game machine in the game machine state buffer as the state of the game machine at the start of fluctuation. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1511.
In step 1511, the main CPU 101 sets "11" in the normal symbol execution phase data so that the normal symbol fluctuation stop process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol change start process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing in step 1402 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.
In step 1600, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol execution phase data is the data “11” indicating the execution of the normal symbol variation stop process. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "11", the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal map execution phase data is "11", the process proceeds to the next step 1601.
In step 1601, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the normal symbol fluctuation time timer counter has elapsed in step 1508. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1602.

In step 1602, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 32, and executes the stop display of the normal symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1603.
In step 1603, the main CPU 101 sets the variable stop display time for stopping and displaying the normal symbol in the normal figure stop display time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1604.

In step 1604, the main CPU 101 sets "12" in the normal symbol execution phase data so that the normal symbol post-stop processing is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing of the normal symbol in step 1403 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.
In step 1700, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol execution phase data is the data “12” indicating the execution of the normal symbol post-stop processing. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "12", the normal symbol post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal map execution phase data is "12", the process proceeds to the next step 1701.
In step 1701, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable stop display time set in the normal figure stop display time timer counter has elapsed in step 1603 described above. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop display time has not elapsed, the normal symbol post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1702.

In step 1702, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop-displayed normal symbol is a hit symbol. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is not a hit symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 1704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol displayed as stopped is a hit symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1703.
In step 1703, the main CPU 101 sets "13" in the normal map execution phase data so that the movable piece control process is executed in the normal figure related control process. Then, the normal symbol post-stop processing is terminated.

Further, in step 1704, which proceeds when it is determined that the normal symbol stopped and displayed in step 1702 is not a hit symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the main CPU 101 starts changing the normal symbol in the normal symbol-related control process. Set "10" in the general diagram execution phase data so that the process is executed. Then, the normal symbol post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the movable piece control process in step 1404 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1800, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal figure execution phase data is the data “13” indicating the execution of the movable piece control process. Then, when it is determined that the normal figure execution phase data is not "13", the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal map execution phase data is "13", the process proceeds to the next step 1801.
In step 1801, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the movable piece 16b is in operation control, that is, whether or not the start winning opening solenoid 16c is energized. Then, when it is determined that the movable piece 16b is in operation control, the process proceeds to step 1804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the movable piece 16b is not under operation control, the process proceeds to the next step 1802.

In step 1802, the state of the gaming machine at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol is in the non-time saving game state, the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state, the special game, or the small hit game. Check which one it was. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1803.
In step 1803, the main CPU 101 refers to the second start winning opening opening control table 118, and uses the energization control data (opening data) of the starting winning opening solenoid 16c according to the state of the gaming machine confirmed in step 1802 described above. , Set the number of times of energization (number of times of opening) and the time of energizing (opening time). Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

Further, in step 1804, which proceeds when it is determined in step 1801 that the movable piece 16b is in operation control, whether or not the main CPU 101 has elapsed the energization time (opening time) set in step 1803 described above. To judge. Then, when it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has not elapsed, the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1805.
In step 1805, the main CPU 101 executes the operation of the movable piece 16b, that is, the stop of energization of the start winning opening solenoid 16c. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1806.

In step 1806, the main CPU 101 sets "10" in the normal symbol execution phase data so that the normal symbol variation start process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

(Playability of pachinko machine P according to this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined) and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state and the first time-saving) A gaming state that combines gaming states), a second low-probability time-saving gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state), or a high-probability time-saving gaming state (high-probability gaming state and second time-saving). One of the game states (game states combined with the game states) is set so that the game progresses.

At the time when the player starts the game, the normal game state is often set. During this normal game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this, the game ball is , There is a possibility of entering the first starting winning opening 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning opening 16. Then, a big hit lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15, and when the big hit is won, the big hit symbols X1, X2 or X3 are determined (see FIG. 7A). ). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined. If this is the case, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the normal game state (see FIGS. 10A and 37). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the player hits the left as instructed during the normal gaming state, the pachinko machine P will shift to the normal gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state by winning the jackpot (Fig. See 37). However, since the jackpot symbol X1 is determined at 1% of the case where the jackpot is won (see FIG. 7 (a)), even if the jackpot is won during the normal game state, the probability of shortening the time is high. It is extremely difficult to shift to the game state.

Here, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state, a lottery for the time saving symbol is performed and the time saving symbol J1 (time saving symbol) is determined with a probability of about 1/100. Obtain (see FIG. 8 (a)). When the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the game state is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state without going through the jackpot and the special game, and this first low-probability time-saving game state is not won by the jackpot. It will continue until the result of the jackpot lottery is derived 20 times.

Further, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the first game area 12a (left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched according to this. Is a big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 as in the normal game state. Then, when a jackpot is won during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined as in the normal gaming state, and the determination probability of each jackpot symbol (determination of the jackpot symbol X1). Since the probability is 1% and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is 99%) is the same as in the normal gaming state, if the jackpot is won during the first low probability time-saving gaming state, the jackpot symbol X2 or the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined (see FIG. 7 (a)). When the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state, so that the gaming state after the end of the special game is the second. It is set to a low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-savings is set to 10,000 (see FIGS. 10 (b) and 37). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the jackpot is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state (until the lottery of the jackpot is derived 20 times), the pachinko machine P is almost in the second low-probability time-saving game state. It will be migrated (see FIG. 37).

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this, the game is played. The ball may enter the second starting winning opening 16 and does not enter the first starting winning opening 15. Then, a big hit lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16, and when the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X1 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 7B). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, as described above, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving number of times is set. Is set to 10000 times. Further, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state again without the predetermined number of game balls entering the specific area 57, and the time-saving is reduced. The number of times is set to 100 (see FIG. 10 (c) and FIG. 37). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the right-handed hit is performed as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, is the second low-probability time-saving game state reset by winning the jackpot? Or, it will shift to a high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 37). Here, when shifting from the first low-probability time-saving game state to the second low-probability time-saving game state, the number of time reductions is set to 10,000 times, and during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the normal game state or the first low probability Since the second start winning opening 16 is much easier to be maintained in the open state than in the time-saving game state, it is almost certain that the next big hit can be won while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls as the game progresses. Since the jackpot symbol X1 is determined by 70% of the case where the jackpot is won (see FIG. 7B), the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the jackpot is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state. It is easy to shift to a high-probability time-saving game state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed) is instructed, and the game ball is launched according to this. As long as there is, a big hit lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X1 or X4 is determined (FIG. 7 (b)). reference). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving game state again, and the number of time reductions is 10,000. Set to times. When the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time reductions is 100. It is set to times (see FIG. 10 (c), FIG. 37).
During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the next big hit can be almost certainly won while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls.

Further, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state of 100 times of time reduction is set (FIG. 10 (c)). , Fig. 37), if the jackpot is won before the jackpot lottery is performed 100 times, it can be expected that the game will shift to the high-probability time-saving game state again.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, during the normal game state, the first low-probability time-saving game is aimed at shifting to the first low-probability time-saving game state by determining the time-saving symbol J1 based on the time-saving symbol lottery. Aim to shift to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state by winning the jackpot during the state (until the result of the jackpot lottery is derived 20 times), and then the second low-probability time-saving gaming state and high probability. By continuing the time-saving game state, a novel game property that aims to acquire many game balls is given. That is, the first low-probability time-saving game state, which can be changed from the normal game state without going through a jackpot winning or special game, shifts to the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to enhance the player's interest by giving the player a playability that serves as a chance zone for the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the time saving symbol is drawn during the normal game state, and the time saving game state (first time saving game state) is set by this lottery. When the symbol J1 (time saving symbol) is determined, it is possible to shift to the time saving gaming state without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game. In addition to being able to give a novel impression to the game, there are many variations in the transition to a time-saving game state, and it is possible to provide unprecedented playability.

(Outline of production in pachinko machine P)
As described above, by executing various processes on the main control board 100, the special figure game, the lottery of the time saving symbol, the normal figure game, the special game, and the small hit game proceed. Then, during the progress of these games, various commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 receives these commands, so that the sub-control board 300 advances the game. Control the production that accompanies.
In the following, a variation effect that is executed during the variation display of the special symbol and can notify the result of the lottery of the jackpot and the result of the lottery of the time-saving symbol will be described.

(Outline of variable production)
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, during the variable display of the special symbol and the time saving symbol, the variable effect capable of notifying the result of the big hit lottery or the result of the determination of the time saving symbol depending on the display mode of the effect symbol 50. Will be executed. In this variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol 50 (dummy symbol) is performed on the background image displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21. Then, the player can be notified of the result of the big hit lottery and the result of the determination of the time saving symbol by the combination of the effect symbols 50 which are stopped and displayed after the variable display (stop display mode).

Specifically, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of all the effect symbols 50 is started from the state in which all the effect symbols 50 are stopped and displayed (FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), See FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b)). The downward arrow in the figure indicates that the effect symbol 50 is scrolled from the top to the bottom.
After that, the effect symbol 50 located on the left side (hereinafter referred to as the first stop symbol), the effect symbol 50 located on the right side (hereinafter referred to as the second stop symbol), and the effect symbol 50 located in the center (hereinafter referred to as the third stop symbol). ) Is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 38 (c) to (e) and 39 (c) to (e)).

Then, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, all the effect symbols 50 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol regardless of the result of determining the time saving symbol (see FIG. 39 (e)). That is, when all the effect symbols 50 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, if the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit or a loss and the time saving symbol J2 (time saving non-granting symbol) is determined, all the effect symbols 50 will not be stopped and displayed with the same symbol. (See FIG. 38 (e)). That is, when at least one effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the other effect symbols 50, it is shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss or a small hit. In addition, the above-mentioned stop display mode does not positively notify that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss or a small hit, but simply recognizes to the player that the result is a loss or a small hit (not a big hit). It is something that makes you. Then, regardless of whether the result of the big hit lottery is a loss or a small hit, the stop display is performed in the same manner. Therefore, the player can obtain the result of the big hit lottery according to the stop display mode of the effect symbol 50. It is not possible to know whether is a loss or a small hit.
The stop display mode of the effect symbol 50 in the case of a small hit is not limited to this, and a specific mode indicating a small hit (a specific mode different from the combination of the effect symbols 50 that is stopped and displayed in the case of a loss) is specified. The effect symbol 50 may be stopped and displayed by a combination of the effect symbols 50 (for example, a combination in which the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol are all different even-numbered symbols).

In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit or a loss and the time saving symbol J1 (time saving assigned symbol) is determined, a special mode (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop) indicating that fact is determined. The effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed at the same odd-numbered symbol other than "7" and the third stop symbol is "7", etc.), and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. The setting image (for example, a character image of "CHANGE ZONE rush !!") is displayed (see FIG. 40 (f)). That is, it is shown that the time saving symbol J1 is determined by the effect symbol 50 being stopped and displayed in a special mode and the above-mentioned set image being displayed.

Further, the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed almost at the same time as the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 and the stop display of the time-saving symbol on the time-saving symbol display device 34. It has become like. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 prior to the stop display of the effect symbol 50, and the result of the jackpot lottery is grasped by the type of the special symbol. It is prevented that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the time saving symbol display device 34, and the result of determining the time saving symbol is grasped by the type of the time saving symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as a mode of variation effect during the normal gaming state, a reachless variation pattern in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed with different symbols, and a first stop symbol A reach variation pattern is provided in which the stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed (so-called reach display is performed) with the same symbol. Each of these variations of the effect has a plurality of aspects, and each aspect is set with various ways of variation, display contents of the effect symbol 50, and the like.

For example, in the reach variation pattern, the normal reach pattern (figure) in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are simply stopped and displayed with the same symbol without any particular change in the variation method or the display content of the effect symbol 50. 39), the display in which all the effect symbols 50 are temporarily stopped in the predetermined stop display mode and then the variable display is restarted is performed a predetermined number of times (so-called pseudo-continuous effect is performed), and then the reach display is performed. Pseudo-continuous reach pattern (not shown), a pattern with development in which a predetermined development effect image is displayed after the reach is displayed (see FIG. 40), and a pattern without development in which the reach development effect is not executed. (See FIG. 39) and the like are provided.
The above-mentioned reach development effect may be one in which one development effect image is continuously displayed, or after the predetermined development effect image is displayed, the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than that of the development effect image. Or, the display may be switched to the display of another development effect image set with a high degree of expectation for determining the time saving symbol J1.
In addition, during the variable effect, along with the variable display of the effect symbol 50, various advance notice images showing the expected degree of winning the jackpot and the expected degree of determination of the time saving symbol J1 are displayed so that the advance notice effect and the like are executed. It has become.

Then, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the high and low possibilities of the above-mentioned reach fluctuation pattern and advance notice effect are set separately when a big hit is won or when the time saving symbol J1 is determined. There is. As a result, it is possible to change the player's expectation for the determination of the jackpot or the time saving symbol J1 according to the reach fluctuation pattern to be executed and the advance notice effect. Specifically, the pseudo-reach pattern, the pattern with development, and the specific advance notice effect may be executed when a big hit is won, or when a loss or a small hit is won and the time saving symbol J1 is decided. Is set high, which raises the player's expectation for the decision of the jackpot and the time saving symbol J1.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the case where the time saving symbol J1 is determined due to the loss or the small hit is better than the case where the big hit is won. There is a high possibility that a pattern or a specific notice effect will be executed.

For example, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, as a notice effect executed before the reach display during the fluctuation effect, it is possible to execute a line notice in which a line by a predetermined character is displayed. There is. As a mode of the dialogue notice, three patterns of the dialogue notice A, the dialogue notice B, and the dialogue notice C are provided.
Further, as a notice effect to be executed after the reach display during the variation effect, it is possible to execute a cut-in notice in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed. The cut-in notice is a blue cut-in notice in which a blue cut-in image is displayed, a red cut-in notice in which a red cut-in image is displayed, and a purple cut-in notice in which a purple cut-in image is displayed. Three patterns are provided.

Then, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined and the jackpot symbol is not determined (that is, the small hit symbol or the lost symbol is determined), the dialogue notice A and the dialogue notice B can be executed as the dialogue notice. Yes, in the above case, the rate at which the line notice A is executed is 15%, and the rate at which the line notice B is executed is 10%. In addition, as a cut-in notice, a blue cut-in notice, a red cut-in notice, and a purple cut-in notice can be executed. In the above case, the ratio of the blue cut-in notice being executed is 10%, and the red cut-in notice is given. The rate of execution is 40%, and the rate of execution of purple cut-in notice is 55%.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is decided, it is possible to execute the line notice A, the line notice B, and the line notice C as the line notice, and in this case, the rate at which the line notice A is executed is 15%. , The rate at which the line notice B is executed is 20%, and the rate at which the line notice C is executed is 25%. In addition, as a cut-in notice, a blue cut-in notice and a red cut-in notice can be executed. In the above case, the ratio of the blue cut-in notice being executed is 10%, and the ratio of the red cut-in notice being executed is. It is 25%.

Further, when the time saving symbol J2 is determined and the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the dialogue notice A and the dialogue notice B can be executed as the dialogue notice, and in this case, the dialogue notice A. Is executed at 3%, and the dialogue notice B is executed at 5%. In addition, as a cut-in notice, a blue cut-in notice and a red cut-in notice can be executed. In the above case, the ratio of the blue cut-in notice being executed is 5%, and the ratio of the red cut-in notice being executed is It is 10%.

That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined and the jackpot symbol is not determined, the rate at which the dialogue notice A is executed is higher than the case where the jackpot symbol is determined. At the same time, the rate at which the line notice B is executed and the rate at which the line notice C is executed are both small. Therefore, when the line notice B or the line notice C is executed, the player is expected to win the jackpot. It is designed to be embraced. In addition, since the dialogue notice C can be executed only when the jackpot symbol is decided, when the dialogue notice C is executed, the winning of the jackpot is confirmed so that the player's interest can be enhanced. It has become.

On the other hand, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined and the jackpot symbol is not determined, the ratio of the blue cut-in notice being executed is the same as when the jackpot symbol is determined, and the red cut-in. Since the rate at which the notice is executed and the rate at which the purple cut-in notice is executed are both large, when the red cut-in notice or the purple cut-in notice is executed, the player expects the decision of the time saving symbol J1. It is designed to be embraced by. The purple cut-in notice can be executed only when the time saving symbol J1 is determined and the jackpot symbol is not determined. Therefore, when the purple cut-in notice is executed, the time saving symbol J1 is determined. It has been confirmed and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.
As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 which is more likely to shift to the high-probability time-saving gaming state than the jackpot winning, which is extremely difficult to shift to the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It has become like.

Further, although not particularly shown, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, various variation effect determination tables for determining the mode of variation effect are stored in the sub ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300. By receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 100, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 selects a variation effect determination table according to a predetermined condition and is within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0). ~ 249) to acquire the effect random number (variable effect random number). Then, the mode of the variation effect is determined based on the selected variation effect determination table, the variation pattern command received from the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100, and the acquired effect random number (variation effect random number).
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, the mode of the variation effect (presence or absence of reach development effect, presence / absence of execution of advance notice effect, etc.) is determined based on the variation pattern command. ing. As a result, the effect display device 21 executes the variation effect based on the determined mode.

The effect that can be executed by the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned variable effect, and is stored, for example, before the execution of the variable effect related to the hold stored in the hold storage area. A look-ahead effect may be provided to give suggestions regarding the hold.
Specifically, the look-ahead effect includes a normal mode, and a special mode in which a jackpot is won or a time-saving symbol J1 is expected to be determined more than in the normal mode when a new hold is stored. Hold pre-reading effect in which hold display is performed in any of a plurality of modes, hold being displayed in a predetermined mode at any timing from the time when hold is stored to the end of variable effect based on the hold. A hold change look-ahead effect that changes the display to a mode in which the expectation of winning a jackpot or determining the time saving symbol J1 is high, or when a new hold is stored, during the change effect based on the hold, or the relevant A high expectation suggestion image (for example,) suggesting that the expectation of winning a jackpot is high over multiple fluctuation effects from the fluctuation effect based on the hold stored prior to the hold to the fluctuation effect based on the hold. , Background image, etc.) may be provided to display a look-ahead zone effect.

Then, in the normal game state, the hold look-ahead in which the hold display is performed in the above-mentioned special mode is better when the time saving symbol J1 is determined due to the loss or the small hit than when the big hit is won. The effect, the pending change look-ahead effect, the look-ahead zone effect, etc. may be set so as to be more likely to be executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 42, as the hold change look-ahead effect, a blue hold change in which the hold display in white changes to a hold display in blue, a red hold change in which the hold display in white changes to a hold display in red, and white Three patterns of purple hold change are provided in which the hold display by is changed to the hold display by purple, and as a look-ahead zone effect, zone A in which the first high expectation suggestion image is displayed and the second high expectation suggestion image are displayed. It is assumed that three patterns of zone B in which is displayed and zone C in which a third high expectation suggestion image is displayed are provided.

Then, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined and the jackpot symbol is not determined (that is, the small hit symbol or the lost symbol is determined) for any of the stored holds, the above-mentioned hold is targeted. As the hold change look-ahead effect, blue hold change, red hold change and purple hold change can be executed. In the above case, the ratio of blue hold change executed is 10% and the ratio of red hold change executed is 40. %, The rate at which the purple hold change is executed may be 55%. Further, as a look-ahead zone effect for the above-mentioned hold, zone A and zone B can be executed. In the above-mentioned case, the ratio of zone A being executed is 15% and the ratio of zone B being executed is 10. May be%.

In addition, if the jackpot symbol is determined for any of the stored holds,
As the hold change look-ahead effect for the above-mentioned hold, the blue hold change and the red hold change can be executed. In the above case, the blue hold change is executed at a rate of 10%, and the red hold change is executed. The ratio may be 25%. Further, as a look-ahead zone effect for the above-mentioned hold, zone A, zone B, and zone C can be executed. In this case, the ratio of zone A being executed is 15%, and zone B is being executed. The rate may be 20% and the rate at which Zone C is executed may be 25%.

Further, when the time saving symbol J2 is determined and the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the blue hold change and the red hold change can be executed as the hold change look-ahead effect for the above-mentioned hold. In the above case, the rate at which the blue hold change is executed may be 5%, and the rate at which the red hold change is executed may be 10%. Further, as a look-ahead zone effect for the above-mentioned hold, zone A and zone B can be executed. In this case, the ratio of zone A being executed is 3%, and the ratio of zone B being executed is It may be 5%.

That is, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined and the jackpot symbol is not determined when the settings are made as described above, the rate at which the blue hold change is executed is the same as in the case where the jackpot symbol is determined, red. Since the rate at which the hold change is executed and the rate at which the purple hold change is executed are both large, when the red hold change or the purple hold change is executed, the player has a sense of expectation for the decision of the time saving symbol J1. Can be squeezed. Since the purple hold change can be executed only when the time saving symbol J1 is determined and the jackpot symbol is not determined, when the purple holding change is executed, the determination of the time saving symbol J1 is confirmed and the game is played. It is possible to enhance the interest of the person.
Even when the settings are made in this way, the player's expectation for the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 can be increased rather than the winning of the jackpot.

When the time saving symbol J1 is determined and the jackpot symbol is not determined when the settings are made as described above, the ratio of zone A execution is the same as that in the case where the jackpot symbol is determined. Since the rate at which B is executed and the rate at which the dialogue notice C is executed are both small, when zone B or zone C is executed, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot. It has become. Since zone C can be executed only when the jackpot symbol is determined, when zone C is executed, the jackpot winning is confirmed, and the player's interest can be enhanced. ing.

(Modification example)
In the above-described embodiment, in a normal gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is relatively low and a non-time-saving gaming state in which the second starting winning opening 16 is relatively difficult to be maintained in the open state are combined. Only in the case, the time-saving symbol is drawn and the time-saving symbol J1 which is the time-saving granting symbol can be determined, and the jackpot winning probability is relatively high during the high-probability gaming state or the second start winning opening 16. During the time-saving game state in which it is relatively easy to be maintained in the open state (that is, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and during the high-probability time-saving game state), a lottery of time-saving symbols is performed. The time-saving symbol J2, which is a non-granting time-saving symbol, has been forcibly determined, but it is not limited to this, and the lottery of the time-saving symbol is performed even during the time-saving game state. It may be.

Specifically, for example, even in the first low-probability time-saving game state (that is, in the game state in which the time-saving game state is set) in which the low-probability game state and the first time-saving game state are combined, the lottery of the time-saving symbol is drawn. It may be set so that the time saving symbol J1 can be determined. Then, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined by the lottery of the time-saving symbol, the first time-saving game state is reset and associated with the time-saving symbol J1. The number of time reductions given may be set again (overwriting the current number of time reductions). For example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the first low probability time reduction game state is 5, and the time reduction symbol J1 (time reduction number 20 times) is determined by the time reduction symbol lottery, the first time reduction game state is set. At the same time as being reset, "20 times" may be set again as the number of time reductions. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until the result of the jackpot lottery is derived 20 times without winning the jackpot again.
Further, in the above case, instead of setting the time saving number associated with the time saving symbol again, the time saving number associated with the time saving symbol may be added to the remaining time saving number at that time point. For example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the first low-probability time reduction game state is 5, and the time reduction symbol J1 (time reduction number 20 times) is determined by the time reduction symbol lottery, the first time reduction game state is set. At the same time as being reset, the remaining number of time reductions may be updated to "25 times (= 5 remaining time reductions + 20 time reductions specified in the time reduction symbol J1)". In this case, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until the result of the jackpot lottery is derived 25 times without winning the jackpot again.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and the chances of setting the time-saving game state without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game are increased, which is more novel. It is possible to impart playability and enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the time saving symbol, only one type of the time saving symbol J1 for setting the first time saving game state and the time saving number of times is set to 20 is provided, but the present invention is limited to this. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of time saving symbols in which different times are set.
Specifically, in addition to the time-saving symbol J1, the time-saving symbol J3 to set the first time-saving game state and the time-saving number of times set to 30 times, the time-saving symbol J3 to set the first time-saving game state, and the time-saving number of times to 50 times The specified time-saving symbol J4, the time-saving symbol J5 for setting the first time-saving game state, and the time-saving number of times set to 10,000 may be provided. Then, when a plurality of types of time-saving symbols are provided, it is set so that any of the time-saving grant symbols can be determined by lottery of the time-saving symbols, and when any of the time-saving grant symbols is determined, the first In addition to setting the time-saving game state, the time-saving number of times specified in the determined time-saving granting symbol may be set.
In this case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment, and to increase the variation of the time-saving gaming state that is set without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game. , It is possible to give more innovative playability and enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one type of time-saving symbol random number is provided as a random number used for the time-saving symbol lottery, and based on this time-saving symbol random number, whether or not the first time-saving game state can be set and whether or not the first time-saving game state can be set, and Although both the number of time reductions when the first time reduction game state is set are determined to determine the time reduction symbol, the process of the lottery of the time reduction symbol is not limited to this.
For example, as the random numbers used in the lottery of the time-saving symbols, the first time-saving symbol random number that determines only whether or not the first time-saving game state can be set, and the first time-saving number of times when the first time-saving gaming state is set are determined. Two types (that is, a plurality of types) of two time-saving symbol random numbers are provided, and after deciding whether or not to set the first time-saving game state based on the first time-saving symbol random number, the first time-saving game state is set. When is determined, the number of time reductions may be determined based on the second time reduction symbol random number.
Even in this case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a time-saving symbol random number, which is a dedicated random number for drawing the time-saving symbol, is provided, and whether or not the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) can be set based on the time-saving symbol random number. It was supposed to determine the time-saving symbol, which is a dedicated symbol for determining, but it is not limited to this, and it is used in the big hit lottery without providing a random number or symbol dedicated to the lottery of the time-saving symbol. It is also possible to determine whether or not the time saving game state (first time saving game state) can be set and the number of time saving games by using various random numbers to be generated and a special symbol to be determined.
For example, the big hit random number used for determining the big hit, the small hit, or the loss (the result of the big hit lottery) may be used together with the lottery of the time saving symbol to determine whether or not the time saving game state can be set. Specifically, a predetermined lottery (lottery of time-saving symbols) is performed based on the jackpot random numbers obtained by entering the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, and the first lottery is performed. If it is a result, the first time-saving game state is not set, but if it is the second lottery result, the first time-saving game state in which the number of time reductions is set to 20 is set, and the third lottery is performed. If it is a result, the first time saving game state in which the time saving number is set to 50 times may be set. Then, in this way, it may be determined whether or not the time saving game state can be set, and the jackpot, the small hit, or the loss may be determined based on the same jackpot random number.
Similarly, a predetermined lottery (lottery of time-saving symbols) is performed based on the special symbol random numbers used for determining the special symbol to determine whether or not the first time-saving game state can be set, and based on the same special symbol random numbers. You may decide a special symbol.

Further, it may be determined whether or not the time saving game state can be set by using the result of the determination of the big hit, the small hit or the loss by the above-mentioned big hit random number, and the special symbol determined by the above-mentioned special symbol random number. That is, a special symbol (missing symbol, small hit symbol) other than the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot lottery is substituted as the time-saving symbol determined in the time-saving symbol lottery in the above-described embodiment, and the determined special symbol is used. Depending on the type of, it may be decided whether or not the time saving game state can be set.
For example, in the case of losing due to a jackpot random number, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined by the special symbol random number, the first time saving game state in which the number of time reductions of 20 times is determined is set, and the lost symbol Z2 is set by the special symbol random number. When is determined, the first time-saving game state may not be set. Further, the lost symbol that can be determined by the special symbol random number is not limited to these, and the lost symbol in which the first time saving game state of the time saving number different from the losing symbol Z1 is set (for example, the time saving number of 50 times) A lost symbol Z3 in which the first time-saving game state is set, a lost symbol Z4 in which the first time-saving game state of 10,000 times of time reduction is set, and the like may be provided.
Further, for example, in the case where a small hit is won by a big hit random number, when the small hit symbol Y1 is determined by a special symbol random number, the first time saving game state in which the number of time saving times is set to 50 times is set and special. When the small hit symbol Y1 is determined by the symbol random number, the first time saving game state may not be set. Further, the small hit symbol that can be determined by the special symbol random number is not limited to these, and the small hit symbol (for example, the number of time reduction) in which the first time saving game state of the time saving number different from the small hit symbol Y1 is set is set. A small hit symbol Y3 in which the first time-saving game state of 80 times is set, a small hit symbol Z4 in which the first time-saving game state of 10,000 times of time reduction is set, and the like may be provided.
As described above, when the special symbol is substituted as the time-saving symbol, it is not necessary to provide the time-saving symbol display device 34 dedicated to the variation display of the time-saving symbol (that is, it is not necessary to change the time-saving symbol). Only the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 may be performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot, the small hit, or the loss is determined by the big hit random number of 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot judgment random number used only for determining whether or not a jackpot will occur, a small hit determination random number used only for determining whether or not a small hit will occur, and a loss determination used only for determining whether or not a loss will occur. Random numbers may be provided separately, and a judgment may be made for each random number to derive a lottery result of a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Then, in such a case, a predetermined lottery (lottery of the time saving symbol) is performed based on the big hit judgment random number, the small hit judgment random number, or the loss judgment random number, and whether or not the first time saving game state can be set is determined. You may.
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol is determined by the special symbol random number of 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit symbol determination random number used only for determining the type of the jackpot symbol when the jackpot is won, a small hit symbol determination random number used only for determining the type of the small hit symbol when the small hit is won, or a loss. A random number for determining the type of the lost symbol, which is used only for determining the type of the lost symbol in The type and the type of the lost symbol may be determined. Then, even in this case, a predetermined lottery (time saving symbol lottery) is performed based on the big hit symbol determination random number, the small hit symbol determination random number, or the lost symbol determination random number in the same manner as described above, and the first time saving game is performed. You may decide whether or not to set the state.

Further, the pachinko machine P according to the above-described embodiment defines a set value of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages from the set value 1 to the set value 6) associated with the setting related to the payout, and this set value. The winning probability of the jackpot may be set differently depending on the difference.
Specifically, a jackpot random number determination table 110 that defines the jackpot winning probability (random number value determined to be a jackpot) is provided corresponding to each of the set values of a plurality of stages, and is set at the time of the jackpot lottery. The result of the jackpot lottery may be determined based on the jackpot random number determination table 110 corresponding to the value. Then, in this case, random numbers used in the lottery set so that the lottery probability differs depending on the set value (for example, big hit random number, big hit judgment random number, small hit judgment random number, loss judgment random number, etc.), Alternatively, a predetermined lottery (for example, a special symbol random number, a time-saving symbol random number) based on any of the random numbers used in the lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the set value. A lottery) may be performed to determine whether or not the first time-saving game state can be set. Further, the above-mentioned predetermined lottery is not performed based on the random numbers used in the lottery set so that the lottery probability differs according to the set value, and the lottery probability is the same regardless of the set value. The above-mentioned predetermined lottery may be performed based only on the random numbers used in the set lottery to determine whether or not the first time saving game state can be set.

Further, when the high-probability gaming state is set in the above-described embodiment, a special symbol (big hit symbol X4) in which the jackpot is won and the setting of the low-probability gaming state is determined is determined thereafter. The high-probability gaming state has ended and the low-probability gaming state has been set, but the control of transition to the low-probability gaming state is not limited to this.
For example, after a high-probability gaming state is set, if a predetermined high-probability number of jackpot lottery (for example, 80 times) is performed without winning the jackpot, the high-probability gaming state ends. (Configured as a so-called ST type pachinko machine). Then, in the pachinko machine set in this way, during the gaming state in which the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are combined, the time-saving symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol that is defined to set the time-saving gaming state is displayed. If it is decided, the time saving game state may be set based on the decision.
Further, for example, a fall lottery random number used for a fall lottery to determine whether or not to end the high-probability game state and set a low-probability game state is provided, and the high-probability game state is ended by the fall lottery based on the fall lottery random number. When it is decided to set the low-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state may be terminated. Then, when a fall lottery random number is provided, a predetermined lottery (lottery of a time saving symbol) may be performed based on the falling lottery random number to determine whether or not to set the first time saving game state.

When the settings are made as described above, the same effects as those in the above-described embodiment are obtained, and the control methods for setting the time-saving gaming state are abundant, and the time-saving gaming state is set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. Is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, at the start of the fluctuation, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) (time-saving symbol lottery) → lottery for big hits is drawn in this order. However, the order of the lottery is not limited to this.
For example, in a pachinko machine in which multiple stages of setting values are not set, the lottery may be processed in the order of lottery for determining whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set → jackpot lottery, or jackpot lottery → The lottery process may be performed in the order of a lottery for determining whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set. Further, in pachinko machines in which setting values of a plurality of stages are set, a lottery for determining whether or not to set a time-saving game state (a lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the set value). ) → The lottery process may be performed in the order of a jackpot lottery (a lottery set so that the lottery probability differs depending on the set value).
In addition, for pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not to end the high-probability gaming state by the fall lottery, and for which setting values for multiple stages are not set, the fall lottery → to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state. The lottery may be processed in the order of the lottery → the jackpot lottery, or the lottery may be processed in the order of the fall lottery → the jackpot lottery → the lottery for determining whether or not the time saving game state can be set. .. In addition, in pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not to end the high-probability gaming state by the fall lottery and the set values of multiple stages are set, the fall lottery (the lottery probability is higher regardless of the set value. Lottery set to be the same) → Lottery to determine whether or not to set the time saving game state (lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the set value) → Big hit lottery The lottery process may be performed in the order of (lottery set so that the lottery probability differs depending on the set value).
When the settings are made as described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and a lottery for determining whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state can be performed at the timing according to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the special game is executed when the result of the big hit lottery is the big hit, but the execution opportunity of the special game is not limited to this. Absent.
For example, in a small hit game executed not only when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit but also when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit (when the small hit symbol is decided). The special large winning opening equipped with a special area where the game ball can enter is opened, and it is also special when the game ball that entered the specific large winning opening during the small hit game enters the special area. It may be set so that the game is executed (configured as a so-called one-kind-two-kind mixed pachinko machine). In addition, after the end of the special game executed based on the above-mentioned small hit winning, the game state (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) according to the small hit symbol determined at the time of the above-mentioned small hit winning is entered. It may be set to migrate.

Then, also in the pachinko machine set as described above (so-called one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machine), a predetermined lottery (lottery of time-saving symbols) for determining whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state is performed in the same manner as described above. It may be set to be performed so that the time-saving game state is set without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game. Further, instead of the predetermined lottery described above, the time saving game state may be set based on the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol determined in the big hit lottery.
In addition, when the above-mentioned predetermined lottery (lottery of time-saving symbols) is performed with a so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine, it is determined that the time-saving game state is set by the predetermined lottery, and the lottery is lost. When becomes, after the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the jackpot lottery is stopped, the time-saving game state is set according to the result of the above-mentioned predetermined lottery, and the time-saving game state is set by the above-mentioned predetermined lottery. Is decided, and when a small hit is won by a big hit lottery, the time saving game state is not set according to the result of the above-mentioned predetermined lottery, and the small hit game and the special game based on the small hit winning are not set. After the end, the gaming state may be set according to the type of the small hit symbol determined based on the winning of the small hit.
Specifically, it is decided to set the first time saving game state (the number of time saving is 20 times) by the above-mentioned predetermined lottery, and in the big hit lottery, the second time saving after the small hit game and the special game are completed. When it is decided to set the game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times), the first time reduction game state is not set and the second time reduction game state is set after the end of the small hit game and the special game. You may do so.
In this case, in addition to achieving the same effects as those in the above-described embodiment, pachinko machines having various specifications can be equipped with a lottery function for determining whether or not a time-saving gaming state can be set, and a small hit. When the winning and the determination of the setting of the time-saving gaming state overlap, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the setting process of the time-saving gaming state becomes complicated.

Further, when a plurality of types of lottery results are provided as the lottery results that can be determined by the above-mentioned predetermined lottery (lottery of time-saving symbols), the second start winning opening 16 is maintained in the open state for each lottery result. It is possible to set a time-saving game state in which the processing contents are different to facilitate the game.
Specifically, for example, a predetermined lottery is performed based on a time-saving symbol random number, which is a dedicated random number for drawing a time-saving symbol, and a time-saving symbol, which is a dedicated symbol for determining whether or not to set a time-saving game state, is performed. When the symbol is set to be determined, as the type of the time-saving symbol that can be determined, the time-saving symbol J1 in which the setting of the above-mentioned first time-saving game state is determined, and the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is non-time-saving. Although it is higher than the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 are the same as those of the non-time-saving game state. Although the fluctuation time is longer than that of the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 are determined by the setting of the fourth time-saving game state, which is the same as the non-time-saving game state. Although the opening time of the time-saving symbol J4 and the second start winning opening 16 is longer than that in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are the same as in the non-time-saving game state. A time-saving symbol J5 or the like in which the setting of the fifth time-saving game state is defined may be provided. In addition to these, any two of the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 will be higher (or longer) than in the non-time saving game state. However, the other one may be provided with a time-saving symbol in which the setting of the time-saving game state, which is the same as the non-time-saving game state, is defined.

Further, for example, when it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving game state can be set by the small hit symbol or the lost symbol determined in the big hit lottery instead of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, the above-mentioned first time-saving game The small hit symbol Y1 (or lost symbol Z1) for which the state setting is defined, the small hit symbol Y3 (or lost symbol Z3) for which the setting of the above-mentioned third time saving game state is determined, and the above-mentioned fourth time saving gaming state. A small hit symbol Y4 (or a lost symbol Z4) whose setting is defined, a small hit symbol Y5 (or a lost symbol Z5) whose setting of the above-mentioned fifth time-saving gaming state may be provided, and the like may be provided. In addition to these, any two of the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 will be higher (or longer) than in the non-time saving game state. However, the other one may be provided with a small hit symbol (or a lost symbol) in which the setting of the time-saving gaming state, which is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state, is defined.

When set as described above, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and in the time-saving game state set without the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game, the second start winning opening 16 Since it is possible to increase the variation of the processing for making it easy to keep the player in the open state, it is possible to give more innovative playability and enhance the interest of the player.

In addition, the types and numbers of time-saving symbols (small hit symbols, lost symbols) that can be determined by the above-mentioned predetermined lottery may be set to be different for each gaming state.
For example, in the case where a predetermined type (for example, 5 types) of time-saving symbols (small hit symbol, lost symbol) for which the setting of the time-saving gaming state is set are provided, all types can be determined in the normal gaming state. In the low-probability time-saving game state, any one or a plurality of types may be set, and in the low-probability time-saving game state, all types can be determined, but in the normal game state, any one or a plurality of types can be determined. It may be set so that a plurality of types can be determined.
Further, for example, although all types can be determined in a specific time-saving game state (for example, the first time-saving game state), any one or a plurality of types can be determined in the other time-saving game state (for example, the third time-saving game state). It may be set so that the type of can be determined.
When set as described above, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and the ratio of the time-saving game state to be set and the type of time-saving game state that can be set are changed for each game state. Therefore, it is possible to give more innovative playability and enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the type of the determined time-saving symbol, but instead of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, the small hit symbol determined in the big hit lottery Alternatively, even when it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set depending on the type of the lost symbol, the variation pattern may be determined according to the determined type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and when the time-saving game state is set without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game, a variation effect rich in variation is produced. Can be executed.

In addition, when it is set to determine whether or not to set the time saving game state according to the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol determined in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot lottery is performed within a predetermined period (for example, from a predetermined start time). (Until 100 times are performed, etc.), the time-saving game state is determined according to the number of times the small hit symbol for which the time-saving game state setting is determined is determined and the number of times the lost symbol for which the time-saving game state setting is determined is determined. May be set.
Specifically, for example, the small hit symbol Y1 (the small hit symbol in which the setting of the first time saving game state of 20 times of time saving is determined) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, etc.) within the above-mentioned predetermined period. In that case, the time-saving gaming state defined in the small hit symbol Y1 may be set. Further, for example, when the lost symbol Z1 (a small hit symbol in which the setting of the first time saving game state of 50 times of time saving is determined) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) within the above-mentioned predetermined period. The time-saving gaming state defined in the lost symbol Z1 may be set.
Even in such a case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the conditions for setting the time-saving gaming state becomes abundant, so that more innovative game performance can be imparted.

Further, in the above-mentioned so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine, when the time-saving game state is set based on the type of the small-hit symbol determined in the big-hit lottery, the time-saving game state is set. When the game ball enters the special area provided in the specific large winning opening during the small hit game based on the determination of the small hit symbol, and during the small hit game, the game ball is provided in the specific large winning opening. The number of time reductions in the time reduction game state set after the small hit game may be the same or different from that when the player does not enter the special area.
Specifically, for example, when the small hit symbol Y1 for which the setting of the first time reduction game state of 20 times of time reduction is determined is determined, the game ball is played during the small hit game based on the determination of the small hit symbol Y1. After the end of the small hit game and the special game, the first time reduction game state of 20 times is set when the player enters the special area, and even when the game ball does not enter the special area, after the end of the small hit game. , The first time-saving game state of 20 times of time-saving may be set.
Further, for example, when the above-mentioned small hit symbol Y1 is determined, during the small hit game based on the determination of the small hit symbol Y1, when the game ball enters the special area, after the small hit game and the special game are completed, The first time-saving game state of 20 times of time reduction is set, and even when the game ball does not enter the special area, the first time-saving game state of 5 times of time reduction is set after the end of the small hit game. You may.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and different time-saving game states can be set depending on whether or not the game ball can be placed in the special area, and there are abundant variations in playability. Can be.

In addition, when setting the time-saving game state when a small hit is won in the big hit lottery, any timing from the winning of the small hit to the end of the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit ( For example, at the time of winning a small hit, at the start of fluctuation of the small hit symbol determined based on the winning of the small hit, at the end of the fluctuation of the small hit symbol, at the start of the small hit game based on the small hit symbol, the small hit During the hit game, the time-saving game state may be set at the end of the small hit game (at the start of the change of the first special symbol after the end of the small hit game).
Similarly, when setting the time-saving game state when a loss occurs in the jackpot lottery, any timing from the time when the loss occurs to the end of the fluctuation based on the loss (for example, the result of the loss lottery is The time-saving gaming state may be set at the time of derivation, at the start of the change of the lost symbol determined based on the loss, at the end of the change of the lost symbol (at the start of the change of the next special symbol, etc.).
Even when the settings are made in this way, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the transition to the time-saving gaming state can be increased, and the variation of the game playability can be increased. ..

In addition, when it is set to determine whether or not to set the time saving game state according to the type of the small hit symbol or the losing symbol determined in the big hit lottery, the time saving number of times in the time saving gaming state is the small hit symbol or the loss. A predetermined number of time reductions may be set according to the type of symbol, or a lottery for determining the number of time reductions at the time of transition to the time reduction game state is performed, and the number of time reductions determined in the lottery is set. May be good.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the number of time reductions can be determined in abundance with variations of the method for determining the number of time reductions. It becomes.

In addition, when it is set to determine whether or not to set the time saving game state according to the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol determined in the big hit lottery, the small hit symbol or the lost symbol determined according to the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol. , The performance of the set time-saving gaming state (the difficulty level at which the second start winning opening 16 is maintained in the open state) may be different.
Specifically, for example, when the small hit symbol Y1 (or the lost symbol Z1) is determined, the second starting winning opening 16 is more likely to be maintained in the open state than in the normal gaming state (winning in the normal symbol lottery). One or more of the settings with a high probability of becoming, the setting with a long fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the setting with a long opening time of the second start winning opening 16) The time saving game state A is set, and a small hit When the symbol Y3 (or the lost symbol Z3) is determined, the time-saving game state B in which the second start winning opening 16 is more likely to be maintained in the open state than the time-saving game state A may be set.

Further, the performance of the set time-saving gaming state may be different depending on the type of the determined small hit symbol or the lost symbol and the set gaming state.
For example, when the small hit symbol Y1 (or the lost symbol Z1) is determined in the normal game state, the above-mentioned time saving game state A is set, but the small hit symbol Y1 (or the lost symbol Z1) is set in the time saving gaming state. ) Is determined, the above-mentioned time saving game state B may be set.

Even in the above case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the performance of the set time-saving gaming state can be enriched, so that more innovative game playability can be imparted. Become.

In addition, when the time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the time-saving game state, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol that the time-saving game state is set, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games is not set (that is,). , The number of time reductions is infinite), and the time reduction game state may be terminated on condition that the jackpot is won, or a lottery (time reduction end symbol) for determining the time reduction end symbol stipulated to end the time reduction game state. The time-saving game state may be ended on the condition that the time-saving end symbol is determined by the lottery. In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving game state is terminated on condition that the time-saving game state, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol for which the upper limit number of time-saving times is set is determined, and the time-saving game state and the time-saving number of times are set (overwritten) based on the determination. You may.
Even in such a case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the end condition of the time-saving gaming state can be enriched, so that more novel game performance can be imparted.

In addition, it is set so that the time-saving game state cannot be set as the next gaming state when the continuous time-saving setting number reaches a predetermined upper limit number (the non-time-saving gaming state is forcibly set). In a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter), when a time-saving symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stipulated that the time-saving gaming state is set in the normal gaming state. , The above-mentioned continuous time reduction setting number may or may not be updated based on the stop display.
Further, in the time-saving game state, even when the time-saving symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned continuous time-saving setting number of times is based on the stop display. May or may not be updated.
In addition, although the time-saving game state is set when it is determined during the normal game state, the time-saving symbol, the small hit symbol or the small hit symbol which is determined not to set the time-saving game state when it is determined during the time-saving game state. Even when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed during the time-saving game state, the above-mentioned continuous time-saving setting number may or may not be updated based on the stop display.
Even in the above case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the difficulty level at which the number of continuous time reduction settings reaches the upper limit can be changed, so that more innovative playability can be imparted. Become.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, the performance of the time-saving game state (normal symbol winning) set based on the determination of the time-saving game state, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol, which is determined to set the time-saving game state. If the probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 and the number of time reductions (one or more) differ depending on the number of times remaining until the number of consecutive time reductions reaches a predetermined upper limit. It may be set to be the same regardless of the remaining number of times.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the time-saving gaming state set in the pachinko machine equipped with the time-saving limiter can be enriched, resulting in more innovative game performance. Can be granted.

In addition, in addition to the fall lottery, the pachinko machine configured so that the time-saving game state is set by determining the time-saving symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol in which the time-saving game state is set is set higher by the fall lottery. When it is decided to end the stochastic gaming state and the time saving symbol, the small hit symbol or the losing symbol for which the setting of the time saving gaming state is determined is determined, the time saving of the time saving gaming state set based on the determination of the symbol is determined. As the number of times, the game state before the above-mentioned determination by the fall lottery and the number of time reductions determined according to the type of the determined symbol may be set, or the above-mentioned determination by the fall lottery is made. The number of time reductions determined according to the previous gaming state and the determined symbol type may be set.
Even in such a case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the number of time reductions set in the time reduction game state can be enriched, so that more innovative game playability can be imparted. Become.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol for which the setting of the time-saving game state is set is determined while the pre-reading effect for notifying the result of the big hit lottery or the lottery result of the time-saving symbol is being executed. The pre-reading effect being executed may be continued, or the pre-reading effect may be stopped without being continued.
In addition, when a hold for which a time-saving game state setting is determined, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol is determined is stored, a specific effect for another hold (look-ahead effect, the other hold) is stored. The execution of a predetermined effect (such as a predetermined effect) that is executed during the variable effect based on the above may be restricted, and if a specific effect for the other hold has already been executed, the specific effect being executed is being executed. You may continue the production of, or you may cancel without continuing.
Even in this case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment is obtained, and an appropriate effect is produced according to the situation of determining the time-saving symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol in which the setting of the time-saving gaming state is determined. Can be executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the above-mentioned condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times) is satisfied, the unit time is increased by increasing the determination rate of the fluctuation time longer than before the condition is satisfied. The number of special games executed per unit time (the number of big hits won per unit time) was reduced, but as a control method by the main CPU 101 to reduce the number of special games executed per unit time. Is not limited to this. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.
In the following, continuous jackpot means winning a jackpot in a normal gaming state, shifting to at least one of a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state, and then continuously winning without shifting to a normal gaming state. It shall be a big hit.

(Specific example 1)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), the fluctuations executed after that are (1) longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol executed before this. It may be set so that the determination rate of a long fluctuation time is high. Further, in the special game executed after this, (2) an opening time longer than the opening time in the special game executed before this may be set, or (3) executed before this. The ending time may be set longer than the ending time in the special game that has been played, or (4) the interval time may be set longer than the interval time in the special game that was executed before this. Alternatively, (5) an opening time longer than the opening time of the large winning opening 18 in the special game executed before this may be set.

(Specific example 2)
For example, when the total number of rounds executed during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), in the fluctuations and special games executed thereafter, the above-mentioned (1) to (5) It may be set as follows.
(Specific example 3)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) and the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), the game is executed thereafter. The fluctuations and special games may be set as described in (1) to (5) above.

(Specific example 4)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three times, etc.) and the predetermined number of hits is reached or after the predetermined number of hits is reached, the jackpot symbol determined is a specific symbol (during a special game). When the number of rounds to be executed is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) and the set jackpot symbol, etc.), in the fluctuation related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuation executed after that, In the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (1) to (5) may be set.
(Specific example 5)
For example, during a continuous jackpot, the total number of rounds executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is a specific symbol (during a special game). When the number of rounds executed in is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) set jackpot symbols, etc.), in the fluctuation related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuation executed after that, , In the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (1) to (5) may be set.

(Specific example 6)
For example, if the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game to the winning of the next jackpot is less than or equal to a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) during a continuous jackpot, the fluctuation related to the winning of the jackpot or this In the variation executed thereafter, and in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (1) to (5) may be set.
(Specific example 7)
For example, it is determined when the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game to winning the next jackpot during a continuous jackpot is less than or equal to a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) and the next jackpot is won. If the jackpot symbol is a specific symbol (a jackpot symbol with a relatively large number of rounds executed during a special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the jackpot is won. In the fluctuation and the fluctuation executed after that, and in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (1) to (5) may be set.

(Specific example 8)
For example, when the total number of prize balls paid out during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000), in the fluctuations and special games to be executed thereafter, the above-mentioned (1) to (5) ) May be set.
(Specific example 9)
For example, the total number of prize balls paid out during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is a specific symbol (during a special game). When the number of rounds executed in is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) set jackpot symbols, etc.), in the fluctuation related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuation executed after that, , In the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (1) to (5) may be set.

(Specific example 10)
For example, when the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot and the number of launched balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 pieces, etc.), in the fluctuations and special games to be executed thereafter, the above-mentioned It may be set as in (1) to (5).
(Specific Example 11)
For example, the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot and the number of launched balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is specified. If the number of symbols (such as a jackpot symbol set with a relatively large number of rounds executed during a special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the change related to the winning of the jackpot or the subsequent execution In the fluctuations to be made, and in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed thereafter, the above-mentioned (1) to (5) may be set.

(Specific Example 12)
For example, the fluctuation pattern determined at the time of winning a predetermined jackpot during the continuous jackpot was a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a relatively short fluctuation time (3 seconds, 6 seconds, etc.) is set). In this case, in the fluctuation executed after that, it may be set as in (1) above, and in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned It may be set as in (2) to (5).
(Specific Example 13)
For example, when the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number is stored, the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number or the second special figure random number is stored before the fluctuation starts based on the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number. It is set so that the pre-judgment process for performing various judgments (judgment as to whether or not to win the jackpot, judgment of the type of special symbol to be determined, etc.) regarding the lottery of the jackpot is executed for the figure random number, and during continuous jackpot , If the judgment result by the pre-judgment process is the predetermined content (for example, the hold stored at the end of the special game includes the one that wins the jackpot, etc.), it is executed after that. The fluctuations and special games to be performed may be set as described in (1) to (5) above.

(Specific Example 14)
For example, when the total elapsed time during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 15 minutes, etc.), in the fluctuations and special games executed after that, as described in (1) to (5) above. It may be set.
(Specific Example 15)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) and the total elapsed time during the continuous jackpot is less than or equal to the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), the game is executed thereafter. In the fluctuations and special games, the settings may be set as described in (1) to (5) above.

(Specific example 16)
For example, when the total execution time of the special game during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.), in the fluctuations and special games executed after that, the above-mentioned (1) to (5) It may be set as follows.
(Specific example 17)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) and the total execution time of special games during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), after that. In the variation to be executed or the special game, it may be set as described in (1) to (5) above.

Even in the case of setting as described above, the number of special games executed per unit time (the number of jackpot winnings per unit time) can be reduced as in the above-described embodiment. As a result, a large number of special games are executed intensively in a short period of time, and the number of prize balls acquired by the player increases sharply. It can be prevented appropriately.

Further, the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 described above can be set in combination with each other as long as there is no contradiction. Further, regarding the above-mentioned settings (1) to (5) when various conditions are satisfied, only one of them may be set, or a plurality of settings may be set.

Further, the main control board 100 is provided with a counter (consisting of a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103) for counting the number of continuous jackpots, and the number of continuous jackpots reaches a predetermined number based on the count value of the counter. It may be determined whether or not. Then, when various conditions in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, any one or a plurality of the above-mentioned settings (1) to (5) may be set.
Further, since the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 during the high-probability time-saving game state, the continuous jackpot is mainly the jackpot won based on the second special figure random number. Therefore, the above-mentioned counter counts the number of consecutive jackpots won based on the second special figure random number, and resets the count value of the counter when the jackpot is won based on the first special figure random number. When the number of consecutive jackpots won based on the second special figure random number reaches a predetermined number, it is determined that the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 is satisfied. You may try to do so. That is, when a big hit is won based on the first special figure random number, it is treated as if the continuous big hit is interrupted, and if the big hit is not continuously won based on the second special figure random number, the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 1 It may be set so as not satisfying the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in 17.
When the jackpot is won based on the second special figure random number, it is decided to execute a special game in which the number of game balls that can be obtained is relatively larger than when the jackpot is won based on the first special figure random number. It is easy to get rid of it, and there is a high possibility that the number of prize balls won by the player in a short period of time will increase sharply. In the case of setting as described above, since only the jackpot based on the second special figure random number is subject to the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots, the above-mentioned settings (1) to (5) are excessively performed. The situation can be prevented.

Further, when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, at least one of (1) regarding the variable time and (2) to (5) regarding the various times during the special game is set in combination. Occasionally, after the various conditions are met, the fluctuation time and the various times during the special game are both longer than before the various conditions are met, but the rate of change of the fluctuation time is longer than the change rate of the various times during the special game. May be set to be larger.
For example, when the conditions in Specific Example 1 are satisfied and the combination of (1) and (2) is set, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol is 3 seconds before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number. And 6 seconds are easy to determine, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number of times, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 13 seconds or 15 seconds (2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number of times). (Change) is set so that it is easy to determine, and before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the opening time during the special game is 10 seconds, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, it is special. The opening time during the game may be set to 15 seconds (changes to 1.5 times the opening time before reaching a predetermined number of times).

Further, when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, when (1) regarding the fluctuation time is set, after the various conditions are satisfied, the fluctuation pattern becomes a reachless fluctuation pattern than before the various conditions are satisfied. Although both the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern are longer, the change rate of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern is larger than the change rate of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern. It may be set to be large, or it may be set so that the change rate of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that is the reach fluctuation pattern is larger than the change rate of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that is the reach fluctuation pattern. ..
For example, when (1) is set when the condition in Specific Example 2 is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reachless fluctuation pattern is 3 before the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number. Seconds and 6 seconds are easy to determine, and after the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reachless fluctuation pattern is 13 seconds or 15 seconds (before reaching the predetermined number). (Changes from 2.5 times to 5 times the fluctuation time of) is set so that it is easy to determine, and before the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern It is easy to determine 20 seconds or 30 seconds as the time, and after the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, 180 seconds or 240 seconds (to a predetermined number) as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern. It may be set so that it is easy to determine (changes to 6 to 12 times the fluctuation time before reaching).
Further, when (1) is set when the condition in the specific example 8 is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reachless fluctuation pattern before the total number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number. 3 seconds or 6 seconds is easy to determine, and after the total number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reachless fluctuation pattern is 13 seconds or 15 seconds (predetermined). (Changes to 2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the number) is set so that it is easy to determine, and the reach fluctuates before the total number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot reaches the predetermined number. It is easy to determine 20 seconds or 30 seconds as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the pattern, and after the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern is 40 seconds or 40 seconds. It may be set so that 45 seconds (changes from about 1.3 times to 2.25 times the fluctuation time before reaching a predetermined number) can be easily determined.

Further, when various conditions in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, other settings may be made instead of the above-mentioned settings (1) to (5). For example, when various conditions are satisfied, the determination rate of the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (6) executed before this becomes higher in the normal map game executed after that. (7) The opening time may be set to be shorter than the opening time of the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 before this.
Further, for example, when various conditions are satisfied, after the end of the special game after that, (8) the number of time reductions set after the end of the special game before this is set to be less than the number of time reductions. You may.
By setting in this way, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is reduced, and the chance of drawing a big hit is also reduced. Therefore, the number of special games executed per unit time (per unit time). The number of big hits won) can be reduced.

Further, for example, when various conditions are satisfied, in the special game to be executed after that, (9) a mode in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than during the previous special game (for example, 0.5 seconds). The large winning opening 18 may be set to open and close in a manner in which opening and closing for 1.0 second are repeated a predetermined number of times.
When set in this way, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the special game is reduced, and the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. As a result, even when a large number of special games are executed intensively in a short period of time, the number of prize balls acquired by the player can be suppressed, resulting in extremely high gambling. It is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, for example, when various conditions are satisfied, (10) when both the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are stored in the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol, the second special figure is stored. The first special figure random number may be set to be processed in preference to the random number.
When set in this way, it is decided to execute a special game with a smaller number of rounds when the jackpot is won based on the first special figure random number than when the jackpot is won based on the second special figure random number. Since the ratio is high, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the special game is reduced, and the expected value of the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. As a result, even when a large number of special games are executed intensively in a short period of time, the number of prize balls acquired by the player can be suppressed, resulting in extremely high gambling. It is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, regarding the settings of (6) to (10), as in the same manner as in (1) to (5), only one of them may be set, or a plurality of settings may be set. Further, it may be set in combination with at least one of (1) to (5).
Further, in the settings of (1) to (6), when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the various times are lengthened, but the predetermined time is lengthened. , Other times may be set to be shorter. For example, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the determination rate of the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol executed before this is set to be higher ((1)). (Setting of (3)), the ending time may be set shorter than the ending time of the special game executed before this (setting of (3)).
In this case, after satisfying the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17, the time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the special game becomes too long, and the profit of the player is extremely hindered. It is possible to prevent such a situation.

Further, when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the settings (1) to (5) are made, and when the various times are lengthened, the execution of a specific effect within the lengthened period. It may be set so that the frequency is high.
For example, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the determination rate of the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been executed before this is set to be higher (setting of (1)). ), When a long fluctuation time is determined, a suggestion effect (specific effect) indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot in the variation may be set to be executed frequently. Further, it may be set so that the execution frequency of the special effect (specific effect) indicating the content irrelevant to the result of the big hit lottery is high.

In addition, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, an opening time longer than the opening time in the special game executed before this is set (setting of (2)), or When the ending time longer than the ending time in the special game that was executed before this is set (setting of (3)), it is stored at that time before the opening time and the ending time elapse. It may be set so that the pre-reading effect (specific effect) that suggests that some of the pending holds can be determined to be a big hit is executed more frequently.
The degree of change in the execution frequency of the specific effect is not particularly limited. For example, although a specific effect has not been executed before the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied, a specific effect may be set to be executed after the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied. Before the various conditions were met, a specific effect was executed at a predetermined execution rate, but after the above-mentioned various conditions were satisfied, a specific effect was executed at a rate higher than the above-mentioned predetermined execution rate. May be set to be executed.
In this case, as described above, while appropriately preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the gambling becomes extremely high, the player's interest is reduced due to the lengthening of various times. Can be prevented.

In addition, when one or more of the settings (1) to (10) are set when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the case where the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The setting may be canceled (that is, the setting may be returned to the setting before the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied).
It should be noted that the predetermined end conditions include, for example, that the variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) by the setting made after satisfying the above-mentioned various conditions, and that the row is performed after the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied. According to the settings, it was determined that a predetermined number of special games (for example, 3 times) were played (a predetermined number of times were won for a big hit) and that the continuous big hit was interrupted (for example, a normal game after the end of the special game) It is possible to set that the jackpot symbol for which the state is to be set has been determined, that the normal game state has been set, that the normal game state has been set and then changed a predetermined number of times, etc.). ..
In such a case, the setting for preventing the situation where the gambling becomes high continues for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

In addition, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of (1) to (10) are set, at least one of the time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state is set. Even when it is continuous (that is, when it is a continuous jackpot), if a specific condition is met (for example, a special game in which the number of game balls that can be acquired is relatively large) is executed. When the associated jackpot symbol X2 is determined consecutively a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, etc.), the above-mentioned setting is canceled (that is, the setting before the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied). (Return to).
In such a case, the setting for preventing the situation where the gambling becomes high continues for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

Further, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, specific external information is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a pachinko machine such as a hall computer) in order to transmit the setting made based on the conditions. It may be transmitted to a device provided outside P), or a predetermined display (for example, a specific display) may be displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 in order to notify that the above setting has been made. The mark image may be displayed, a caution display such as "game progress time is being changed") may be displayed, or the lamp may be turned on in a predetermined manner.
Further, when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the history information indicating that fact may be stored in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100 or the sub RAM 303 of the sub control board 300. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency and period of setting to prevent the situation of high gambling, which is useful for the development of pachinko machines that are unlikely to have high gambling. it can.

Further, the pachinko machine P includes a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables 115 set so that the length of the fluctuation time that can be determined and the determination ratio of the fluctuation time are different, and is a big hit in a state where various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied. After the special game based on the jackpot is completed, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the different fluctuation pattern table 115 based on the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. It is assumed that it has been set.
And even when it is set in this way, if one or more of (1) to (10) are satisfied and one or more of the above conditions are satisfied and the jackpot is won, the jackpot is won. Regardless of which jackpot symbol is determined at the time of winning the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) may be determined with reference to the common fluctuation pattern table 115.
Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in a state where the above-mentioned various conditions are not satisfied, a relatively long fluctuation time is set after the end of the special game based on the jackpot. When the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined with reference to the first fluctuation pattern table 115 in which the determination ratio is set high, and the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined without satisfying the above-mentioned various conditions. After the end of the special game based on the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined with reference to the second fluctuation pattern table 115 in which the determination ratio of the relatively short fluctuation time is set high. It is assumed that it was set to. Then, when the settings are made in this way, even when the jackpot is won and either the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined while satisfying the above-mentioned various conditions, after the special game based on the jackpot is completed. Determines the variation pattern (fluctuation time) with reference to the third variation pattern table 115 in which the determination rate of the variation time longer than the variation time that can be determined by the first variation pattern table 115 is set high. You may.

Further, the pachinko machine P may be provided with the following variation pattern table 115. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern table 115 will be specifically described. Here, the time saving symbol is not considered, and the winning of the small hit is not determined in the big hit lottery, and the jackpot symbol determined when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 is X1 and It is assumed that there are two types of X2 and one type of lost symbol is Y2.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 44, refer to the case where the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied in the high-probability time-saving game state. The second is when one or a plurality of the above-mentioned (1) to (10) are set while the various conditions of the specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied in the table C and the high-probability time-saving game state. Tables D1, D2, and D3 that are referred to when a game ball enters the starting winning opening 16 may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 43, according to Table C, when the lost symbol Y2 is determined, "3 seconds" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49 regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved at the present time. When the fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "variation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, "5 seconds". When the fluctuation pattern command "C1H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "variation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 224, "10 seconds". When the fluctuation pattern command "C2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "variation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 225 to 249, "15 seconds". The fluctuation pattern command "C3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "variation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds) is determined.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "30 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is the entire fluctuation time) when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, regardless of the current number of 2nd special figure reservations. The fluctuation pattern command "D0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to 30 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is 60). The fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is 100 seconds). The fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time becomes 120 seconds). The variation pattern command "D3H" associated with the set variation pattern) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), according to the table D1, when the lost symbol Y2 is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 12, regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved at the present time, " The fluctuation pattern command "C0H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "3 seconds fluctuation" is associated is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 13 to 25, the fluctuation pattern command to which the fluctuation pattern of "5 seconds fluctuation" is associated is determined. When "C1H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 26 to 50, the fluctuation pattern command "" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "50 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 50 seconds). When "C4H" is determined and the variation pattern random number is 51 to 150, the variation pattern command "C5H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined, and the variation pattern random number is 225 to 249. At that time, the fluctuation pattern command "C6H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "100-second fluctuation" is associated is determined.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is associated when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved at the present time. The variation pattern command "D1H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the variation pattern command "D2H" associated with the variation pattern of "100 seconds variation" is determined, and the variation pattern random number is 125. When the value is ~ 174, the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 150 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 175. When it is 249, the fluctuation pattern command "D5H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 200 seconds) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 44 (b), according to the table D2, when the lost symbol Y2 is determined, when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 24 regardless of the current number of the second special figure reserved, " The fluctuation pattern command "C4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "50 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 25 to 74, the fluctuation pattern command associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is associated. When "C5H" is determined and the variation pattern random number is 75 to 149, the variation pattern command "" is associated with the variation pattern of "70 seconds variation" (the variation pattern in which the entire variation time is set to 70 seconds). "C7H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 150 to 249, the variation pattern command "C6H" associated with the variation pattern of "100 second variation" is determined.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern random number when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved at the present time. The variation pattern command "D1H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the variation pattern command "D2H" associated with the variation pattern of "100 seconds variation" is determined, and the variation pattern random number is 125. When the value is ~ 174, the variation pattern command “D4H” associated with the variation pattern of “150 second variation” is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 175 to 249, the variation pattern of “200 second variation” is determined. The variation pattern command "D5H" associated with is determined.

As shown in FIG. 44 (c), according to the table D3, when the lost symbol Y2 is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 249, regardless of the current number of the second special figure reserved, " The variation pattern command "C5H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern random number when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved at the present time. The variation pattern command "D1H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the variation pattern command "D2H" associated with the variation pattern of "100 seconds variation" is determined, and the variation pattern random number is 125. When the value is ~ 174, the variation pattern command “D4H” associated with the variation pattern of “150 second variation” is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 175 to 249, the variation pattern of “200 second variation” is determined. The variation pattern command "D5H" associated with is determined.

Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied in the high-probability time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern (see Table C). That is, when the fluctuation time) is determined, and one or more of the above-mentioned (1) to (10) are set while satisfying various conditions of the specific examples 1 to 17 in the high-probability time-saving game state. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the variation pattern table 115 of any of the table D1, the table D2, or the table D3.
Further, when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of the above-mentioned (1) to (10) are set in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning opening 16 When the game ball enters the ball, the variation pattern table 115 to be referred to may be switched by satisfying a predetermined switching condition. Specifically, the variation pattern table 115 to be referred to may be switched from table D1 → table D2 → table D3 according to the number of consecutive jackpots. Further, the fluctuation pattern table 115 to be referred to may be switched from table D3 → table D2 → table D1 according to the number of fluctuations.

(Other game characteristics to which the setting of the time saving game state is applied)
Next, an example of another game property to which the control of setting the time-saving game state without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game will be described. In the following, the description will focus on configurations and controls different from those of the above-described embodiment, and the description of similar configurations and controls will be omitted unless necessary.
(Other application example 1)
(Outline of configuration and control)
Although not particularly shown, the configuration of the game board 11 (game area 12) of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1 and the devices and members installed are substantially the same as those of the above-described embodiment. However, as will be described later, the time saving symbol display device 34 is not provided because it is not determined whether or not the time saving game state can be set using the dedicated time saving symbol random number or the time saving symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-short-probability gaming state are combined) and a second low-probability time-saving gaming state are similar to those in the above-described embodiment. Either (a gaming state that combines a low-probability gaming state and a second time-shortening gaming state) or a high-probability time-saving gaming state (a gaming state that combines a high-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state) is set. It is supposed to be done.
Then, as in the above-described embodiment, during the normal gaming state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a, so as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction. In, the game ball can enter the first starting winning opening 15. On the other hand, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the special game, and the small hit game, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b. As long as the game ball is launched according to this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting winning opening 16, and enter the large winning opening 18 (see FIG. 3). ..

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15. When a jackpot is won based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined. The jackpot winning probability in the normal gaming state is set to about 1/150, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability time-saving gaming state is set to about 1/110.
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and a predetermined number (for example, one) is executed in a specific round game (for example, three rounds). The game ball cannot enter the specific area 57, and the normal game state is set after the end of the special game. In addition, about 400 game balls can be acquired during the special game.
On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 in the specific round game. After the end of the special game, a high-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving times is 10,000 times) is set. In addition, about 1000 game balls can be acquired during the special game.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, it is not determined whether or not the time saving game state can be set by using the dedicated time saving symbol random number or the time saving symbol as in the above-described embodiment. Instead of this, as a lost symbol that can be determined when the result of the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is lost, the second time saving game state (the set time saving number is A lost symbol Z1 that defines that a predetermined number of times (10000 times in this application example) is set, and a lost symbol Z2 that defines that the time-saving gaming state is not set are provided. Then, in the normal gaming state, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined due to the loss based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, the above-mentioned second time-saving gaming state is set. That is, if the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state, the subsequent game state shifts from the normal game state to the second low-probability time-saving game state. It is designed to do. On the other hand, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
The probability that the lost symbol Z1 is determined when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15 is set to about 1/500.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if a loss occurs based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening 16, the loss symbol Z1 is not determined. Further, even if the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during a game state other than the normal game state (second low-probability time-saving game state or high-probability time-saving game state), the lost symbol Z1 is determined. , The second time saving game state is not set. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball of the first start winning opening 15, the game state at that time is changed. There is no such thing, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 is not reset. The remaining number of time reductions at that time point is updated (that is, subtracted by 1).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the upper limit of the number of continuous probability variation settings is set to 5. In the pachinko machine P, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined as described above, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row because the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set after the special game based on the determination is completed. Then, after the end of the special game based on the decision, the normal game state is forcibly set.

(Gameability of pachinko machine P according to other application example 1)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state combining a low-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state), a second low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state and A game state in which the second time-saving game state is combined) or a high-probability time-saving game state (a game state in which the high-probability game state and the second time-shortened game state are combined) is set so that the game proceeds. It has become.

At the time when the player starts the game, the normal game state is often set. During this normal game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this, the game ball is , There is a possibility of entering the first starting winning opening 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning opening 16. Then, a big hit lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15, and when the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X1 is determined. When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the normal game state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is not set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game during the normal gaming state.

Here, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state, the result of the big hit lottery becomes a loss and the lost symbol Z1 can be determined (decision probability is about 1/500). ing. When the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the game state is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state without going through the jackpot and the special game, and this second low-probability time-saving game state is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state without winning the jackpot. It will continue until the result of the jackpot lottery is derived 10,000 times.

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this, the game ball is the first. 2 There is a possibility of entering the starting winning opening 16, and the ball will not enter the first starting winning opening 15. Then, a big hit lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16, and if the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X2 is determined. When the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability time saving game state, and the number of time saving is set to 10,000 times. .. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if the pachinko machine P is hit right as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, it shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state by winning the jackpot. (See FIG. 45). Here, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning opening 16 is much easier to be maintained in the open state than during the normal game state, so that while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls as the game progresses. , You can almost certainly win the next big hit and move to a high-probability time-saving game state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed) is instructed, and the game ball is launched according to this. As long as there is, a big hit lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X2 is determined. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving game state again, and the number of time reductions is 10,000. Set to times. During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the next jackpot can be almost certainly won while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls, and the high-probability time-saving game state is set again. To.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, when the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the jackpot is substantially won again during the game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state is changed again. Set. Therefore, once the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the jackpot symbol X2 can be continuously determined, and until the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row (the number of continuous probability variation settings reaches the upper limit). (Until) The high-probability time-saving game state continues. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, when the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 is executed five times in succession without shifting to the normal game state. Will be done.

Here, for example, it is assumed that the pachinko machine P is configured to set a high-probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (400 game balls that can be acquired during the special game). .. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and as described above, when the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the jackpot does not shift to the normal gaming state. The symbol X2 can be continuously determined.
However, in the pachinko machine P configured in this way, since the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is also counted as the number of continuous probability variation settings. Become. Then, after setting the high-probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined four times in a row, the number of continuous probability variation settings reaches the upper limit, and the special game based on the determination The game state after the end is set to the normal game state. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired between the time when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined (the transition to the high-probability time-saving gaming state is determined) and the time when the normal gaming state is set is 4400 (= the jackpot symbol X1 is determined). 400 game balls that can be obtained in one special game based on + 1 time + 1000 game balls that can be obtained in one special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, as described above, the first low is performed through the second low probability time-saving gaming state set based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1 in the normal gaming state. Since the high-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 during the probability time-saving game state, the normal game state is changed after the jackpot symbol X2 is determined (the transition to the high-probability time-saving game state is determined). The number of game balls that can be acquired before the setting is 5000 (= 1000 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 x 5 times).

Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a jackpot is won based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, either the first jackpot symbol or the second jackpot symbol is determined. When any of the jackpot symbols is determined, the high probability gaming state is always set on the condition that the number of continuous probability variation settings has not reached the upper limit, but the first jackpot It is assumed that when the symbol is determined, the time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game, and when the second jackpot symbol is determined, the non-time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game. Further, in this pachinko machine P, when the jackpot symbol is determined by winning the jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, the number of continuous probability variation settings has reached the upper limit. The number of game balls that can be obtained during the special game when the game ball is set to the high probability game state without fail and a big hit is obtained by entering the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 is the first. It is assumed that the number of game balls that can be obtained during the special game is set to be larger than the number of game balls that can be obtained in the case of a big hit due to the entry of the game balls into the starting winning opening 15. Further, in this pachinko machine P, during the non-time-saving game state, the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a in order to allow the game ball to enter the first start winning opening 15, and the game ball is launched in the time-saving game state. Is supposed that the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b in order to allow the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16.

In the pachinko machine configured as described above, when the second jackpot symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, the high value is obtained after the special game based on the determination is completed. Since the transition to the stochastic gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state is performed, the number of continuous probability variation settings increases, but after that, the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is performed. Then, when the first jackpot symbol is determined and the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the number of continuous probability variation settings has already increased, which is advantageous for the player by the time the number of continuous probability variation settings reaches the upper limit. This is disadvantageous for the player because the number of times a jackpot can be won based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 is reduced.

On the other hand, when it is set to shift to the time-saving game state based on the determination of a specific loss symbol or small-hit symbol that is not the jackpot symbol, as in the pachinko machine according to the other application example 1, the time-saving game Since the number of continuous probability variation settings does not increase before the transition to the state and the transition to the time-saving gaming state occurs when the number of continuous probability variation settings is 0, the above-mentioned disadvantageous situation does not occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the second directly is based on the determination of the predetermined jackpot symbol by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 in the normal game state. A specific loss symbol (loss symbol Z1) due to the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state, instead of shifting to the high-probability time-saving gaming state in which the game ball enters the start winning opening 16. ), Through the low-probability time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) in which the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16. Based on the determination of the predetermined jackpot symbol by, the player shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state.
Therefore, from the time when the jackpot symbol that defines the transition to the high-probability time-saving game state is determined until the end of the high-probability time-saving game state, all the game balls enter the second start winning opening 16. It is possible to obtain game profits that can be granted based on (for example, the number of rounds during a special game executed based on the winning of a big hit), and it is possible to grant a novel game property that enhances the interest of the player.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the time-saving gaming state is set by determining a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) during the normal gaming state, but the game is limited to this. Instead, the time-saving gaming state may be set by determining a specific small hit symbol during the normal gaming state.
Further, as in the above-described embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when the lost symbol Z1 in which the setting of the time saving gaming state is determined is determined, a specific effect is obtained as compared with the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. It may be set so that the execution rate of (a look-ahead effect, a reach development effect with a high expectation of the player during the variable effect, etc.) is high.

(Other application example 2)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2 has substantially the same configuration and control as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the number of time reductions is reduced after the end of the special game based on the determination. A high-probability time-saving game state of 100 times is set. Since the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 is set to about 1/110, which is the same as in other application examples 1, it is not always the case that the next jackpot is won during the high-probability time-saving game state, and the jackpot is won. When the big hit lottery is performed 100 times, the normal game state is set.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the upper limit of the number of continuous probability variation setting times is not particularly set, and the condition for setting the low probability time saving game state (winning a big hit during the high probability time saving game state). The high-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until the jackpot lottery is performed 100 times without doing anything).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, when the result of the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into not only the first start winning opening 15 but also the second starting winning opening 16 is lost. Also, it is stipulated that the second time-saving game state (the set number of time-saving games is a predetermined number of times (10000 times in this application example)) is set, or the lost symbol Z1 or the time-saving game state is not set. The lost symbol Z2 can be determined. Then, in the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned second time-saving gaming state is set even when the losing symbol Z1 is determined due to the loss based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16. That is, if the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball of the second start winning opening 16 during the normal game state, the subsequent game state shifts from the normal game state to the second low-probability time-saving game state. It has become like. On the other hand, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined in the normal game state, the game state remains in the normal game state.
The probability that the lost symbol Z1 is determined when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 is set to about 1/7.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (second low-probability time-saving gaming state or high-probability time-saving gaming state), the gaming ball of the second start winning opening 16 is entered. Even if the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the above, the second time saving game state is not reset. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball of the second start winning opening 16, the game state at that time is changed. There is no such thing, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 is not reset. The remaining number of time reductions at that time point is updated (that is, subtracted by 1).

(Gameability of pachinko machine P according to other application example 2)
Regarding the flow of the game from the normal gaming state and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2 to the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1 Is the same as.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, as described above, the number of time reductions in the high-probability time-saving game state is set to 100 times. The high-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set.
Here, during the high-probability time-saving game state, the game ball is always launched into the second game area 12b, and the game ball can pass through the gate 20. Then, when the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, the second hold number is 4 which is the upper limit number (that is, the second special figure random number is 4 hold memory of the upper limit number). Is likely to be). Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the second special figure random number is preferentially processed over the first special figure random number as in the above-described embodiment. The jackpot lottery process is performed for up to four second special figure random numbers that are held and stored at that time, prior to the first special figure random numbers that are held and stored when the normal game state of is set. Will be done.

After the normal game state is set, the launch of the game ball toward the first game area 12a is resumed, and the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 with the aim of entering the game ball into the high-probability time-saving game state. Will aim for the transition again.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the lost symbol Z1 is determined in the jackpot lottery based on a maximum of four second special symbol random numbers stored on hold at the time when the above-mentioned normal game state is set. Then, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state of 10,000 times is set, and then the high-probability time-saving gaming state is reset. That is, even if the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the second special figure random number held at this point, so that the second low-probability time-saving game state is entered. By shifting, the game ball can be entered into the second start winning opening 16, and when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the entry, the game is re-shifted to the high-probability time-saving game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the pachinko machine P is specified based on the second special figure random number acquired by entering the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 during the normal game state. When the lost symbol (missing symbol Z1) is determined, it is possible to shift to the second low-probability time-saving game state without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game, and then to the high-probability time-saving game state. There is.
As a result, based on the second special figure random number that is held and stored when the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, the high-probability time-saving game is performed without the intervention of winning a jackpot and executing a special game. It will be possible to re-shift to the state, and it will be possible to give a novel playability that enhances the interest of the player.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, as in the other application example 1, the time-saving gaming state may be set by determining a specific small hit symbol during the normal gaming state.

(Other application example 3)
(Outline of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3 is a so-called one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machine, and either wins a big hit or moves to a special area described later during a small hit game based on the small hit winning. It is configured so that a special game is executed when the ball enters.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, and the devices and members installed on the game board 11 are other than the attacker device 17, other application examples 1 and other application examples 2. It is the same.
Although not particularly shown, the attacker device 17 has the same structure as the specific area 57 instead of the specific area 57 provided in the above-described embodiment, other application example 1 and other application example 2. It has the same internal structure as the above-described embodiment, other application example 1 and other application example 2, except that it has a special area having a different function.

Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, other application example 1 and other application example 2, during the special game based on the winning of the big hit, or during the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit, the big winning opening 18 Is opened, and the game ball can enter the large winning opening 18. However, during the special game, the distribution member 59 is stopped at the first position, and the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. On the other hand, during the small hit game, the distribution member 59 is stopped at the second position, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 does not enter the general area 58, but all enters the special area. It is designed to do.
That is, the game ball can enter the special area only during the small hit game, so that the game ball enters the special area during the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit, and the special game is executed. It is supposed to be done.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, a predetermined area (specific area 57) of the large winning opening 18 during the special game, as in the above-described embodiment, the other application example 1 and the other application example 2. Depending on whether or not a predetermined number of gaming balls have entered the), the gaming state after the end of the special game is not set, but the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot or the small hit determined at the time of winning the jackpot. The above-mentioned gaming state is set according to the winning symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, the normal gaming state, the low-probability gaming state, and the first time-saving gaming state (the winning probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol), which is a combination of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, are used. The first low-probability time-saving gaming state, or the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state (winning of a normal symbol) in which the fluctuation time and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 are the same as those in the above-described embodiment). A gaming state of any of the second low-probability time-saving gaming states is set by combining the probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting winning opening 16 (the contents are the same as those in the above-described embodiment).
Then, as in the above-described embodiment, during the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a. As long as the game ball is launched in accordance with the above, the game ball can enter the first starting winning opening 15. On the other hand, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the special game, and during the small hit game, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b, so that the game ball is launched according to this instruction. As long as this is done, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting winning opening 16, and enter the large winning opening 18 (see FIG. 3).

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when a game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15, a jackpot can be won, and if the jackpot is won, a jackpot can be won. The symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (left-handed), the special game is executed based on the winning of the jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
The probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state. Further, the upper limit number of holdings of the first special figure random number (the upper limit number of the first holding number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15 is set to two. The maximum number of holdings of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls can be acquired.
Further, as shown in FIG. 46, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings described later has not reached the upper limit, the gaming states at the time of the determination are the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state. In any of the (first low-probability time-saving game states), the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. On the other hand, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, if a big hit based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is lost in the lottery, the lost symbol Z1 is determined. When the lost symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming states at the time of the determination are the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state). In any case, the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100 times) is set after the determination. On the other hand, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the determination.
That is, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the continuous time-saving setting number has not reached the upper limit, the first low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving number of times are reset. It becomes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, a big hit or a small hit can be won, and the big hit can be obtained. If the player wins, the big hit symbol X2 is determined, and if the small hit is won, the small hit symbol Y1 is determined. That is, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (right-handed), based on whether the jackpot is won (whether the jackpot symbol X2 is determined) or the small hit is won (decision of the small hit symbol Y1). A special game is executed through the small hit game to be executed.
As shown in FIG. 46, the winning probability of the jackpot when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state, and the second start winning is won. The winning probability of a small hit when a game ball enters the mouth 16 is set to about 299/300 regardless of the game state. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, either the big hit or the small hit is determined in the big hit lottery, and the loss is not determined. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, a special game is always executed.
Further, the upper limit number of holdings of the second special figure random number (the upper limit number of the second holding number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 is set to one. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined and when the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls are executed. Can be acquired.
Further, as shown in FIG. 46, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of the determination has a second low probability. When the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the end of the special game based on the decision in the time-saving game state, and the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state. In addition, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game based on the decision. On the other hand, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.
That is, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-savings are set. It will be reset.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, the upper limit of the number of continuous time reduction settings is set to three. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set during the normal gaming state or the first. When the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the jackpot symbol X2 or the small-hit symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state. When this is done, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and any of these determinations is counted as the number of consecutive time-saving setting times. Then, when these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time reduction settings reaches the upper limit, and therefore, after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol or the small hit symbol described above, the above-mentioned After the lost symbol is determined, the normal game state is forcibly set.

(Gameability of pachinko machine P according to other application example 3)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined), the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state, and the non-time-saving gaming state) Either the first time-saving game state (game state in which the first time-saving game state is combined) or the second low-probability time-saving game state (game state in which the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state are combined) is set, and the game proceeds. It has become like.

(1) When a jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state (when the number of continuous time-saving settings is 0) When the player starts the game, the normal game state is set. In the normal game state, the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0 (that is, the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 3).
During the normal game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this, the game ball is Since there is a possibility that the ball enters only the first starting winning opening 15, a big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is performed during the game state. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0) as described above, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, so that the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on the above, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is two).
Further, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched according to this. Since the game ball may enter only the second start winning opening 16, a big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is performed during the game state. .. In the jackpot lottery, as described above, the lottery result of either the jackpot winning (determination of the jackpot symbol X2) or the small hit winning (determination of the small hit symbol Y1) is derived. Then, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the end of the special game based on the determination (FIG. 46, FIG. (See FIG. 47), the number of continuous time reduction settings is increased by one (the remaining number until the upper limit is reached is reduced by one). Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the special game is continuously executed until the number of times of continuous time-saving setting reaches the upper limit.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time saving setting times is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Since the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one based on this, if the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined twice thereafter, the normal game state is forcibly set after the end of the special game based on the determination. ..
As described above, the upper limit number of hold of the second special figure random number (the upper limit number of the second hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to one. During the fluctuation based on the determination of the big hit symbol X2 and the small hit symbol Y1, the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 and one second special symbol random number is reserved and stored. Therefore, even if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined twice and the normal game state is forcibly set, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is further determined once more based on one second special symbol random number stored at this point. The symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, and the special game based on the determination is executed. When the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined in the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 46 and 47). ), After the above-mentioned special game is completed, the normal game state is maintained as it is before the special game is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state in which the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0, it is until the normal game state is set again. A total of 2 special games (3 times in total including the special game executed based on the big hit or small hit by the second special figure random number stored on hold) will be executed.

(2) When the jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of continuous time-saving setting times is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set (1), the first start in the normal game state If a lost symbol Z1 is determined due to a loss in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the winning opening 15, the gaming state after the determination is set to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (FIG. 46). , See FIG. 47). Then, based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one (the remaining two until the upper limit is reached).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of times of continuous time-saving setting is one), the game ball is continuously launched into the first game area 12a. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving game state. Therefore, based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIGS. 46 and 47), the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two (the remaining one until the upper limit is reached).

Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of continuous time-saving setting times is one) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, then the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit When the symbol Y1 is determined once, the normal game state is forcibly set after the end of the special game based on the determination.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, if the jackpot is won in the first low probability time saving game state in which the number of continuous time saving setting times is one, the normal gaming state is set again. In the meantime, one special game (two times in total including the special game executed based on the big hit or small hit by the second special figure random number stored on hold) will be executed.

(3) When the jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set in the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of continuous time-saving setting times is 2) Also, based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1 in the normal game state. When the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of times of continuous billion-time reduction is set once) is set, when the lost symbol Z1 is further determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game state after the determination is the first. 1 It is reset to the low-probability time-saving game state (see FIGS. 46 and 47). Then, based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two (the remaining one until the upper limit is reached).
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 in this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of continuous time-saving setting times is 2), the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on the determination of X1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 3 (the remaining number until the upper limit is reached is 0).
Then, even though the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the number of consecutive time reduction settings reaches the upper limit of three times, so that the second low-probability time reduction game state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. The normal game state is forcibly set without any problem.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, if a big hit is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of continuous time-saving settings is two, the game to the second start winning opening 16 is played. The normal game state is set again without executing the special game based on the ball entering.

If the loss symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 in the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of continuous time-saving settings is 2), the loss is determined. Based on the determination of the symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 3 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 0), so that the normal gaming state is forcibly set after the determination (FIG. 46, FIG. See FIG. 47). Then, the above-mentioned (1) to (3) are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, a specific loss symbol (loss symbol Z1) is performed without winning a big hit and executing a special game. Is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the number of continuous time-saving setting times is updated. Then, at the time when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set according to the number of times when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, the upper limit of the number of continuous time-saving setting times is set. The remaining number of times to reach is changed. As a result, the number of times the special game is continuously executed during the second low-probability time-saving game state (until the normal game state is set again) changes, which is a novelty that enhances the interest of the player. It is possible to give a good playability.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to set the winning of the big hit or the small hit when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, and it may be set so as to be lost with a predetermined determination probability. ..

(Other application example 4)
(Outline of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4 is also a so-called one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machine, and has the configuration of the game board 11, the devices and members installed on the game board 11, and the game state to be set. The gaming areas 12 for launching the gaming balls during each gaming state are all the same as those of the other application examples 3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, the jackpot can be won when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 as in the other application example 3. Therefore, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (left-handed), the special game is executed based on the winning of the jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
The probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state. Further, the upper limit number of holdings of the first special figure random number (the upper limit number of the first holding number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15 is set to two. The maximum number of holdings of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 400 game balls can be acquired.
Further, as shown in FIG. 48, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of continuous time reduction settings described later has not reached the upper limit, the gaming states at the time of the determination are the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state. In any of the (first low-probability time-saving game states), the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. On the other hand, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, when a big hit based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is lost in the lottery, the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined. .. The determination probability of the lost symbol Z1 is set to about 1/50, and the determination probability of the lost symbol Z2 is set to about 49/50.
When the lost symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming states at the time of the determination are the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state). In any case, the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 10,000 times) is set after the determination. On the other hand, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the determination.
That is, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the continuous time-saving setting number has not reached the upper limit, the first low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving number of times are reset. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined, the time saving game state is not set. That is, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined during the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state continues even after the determination, and when the lost symbol Z2 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the said Even after the decision, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, a big hit or a small hit can be won, and the big hit can be obtained. If a winner is won, the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and if a small hit is won, the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined. That is, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (right-handed), the jackpot is won (whether the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined), or the small hit is won (decision of the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2). ) Is executed, a special game is executed through a small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 48, the winning probability of the jackpot when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state, and the second start winning is won. The winning probability of a small hit when a game ball enters the mouth 16 is set to about 299/300 regardless of the game state. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, either the big hit or the small hit is determined in the big hit lottery, and the loss is not determined. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, a special game is always executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 at the time of winning the jackpot are both halved. Similarly, the probability of determining the small hit symbol Y1 and the probability of determining the small hit symbol Y2 at the time of winning the small hit are both halved.
Further, the upper limit number of holdings of the second special figure random number (the upper limit number of the second holding number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 is set to two. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 400. You can get individual game balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state and In any of the second low-probability time-saving game states, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. On the other hand, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.
That is, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state and the continuous time-saving set number of times has not reached the upper limit, the second low-probability time-saving game The state and the number of time reductions will be set (reset during the second low probability time reduction game state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the second. 2 When the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the end of the special game based on the decision, and the game state at the time of the decision is the normal game state. When there is, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game based on the decision. On the other hand, when the continuous time reduction set number of times has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.
That is, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-savings are set. It will be reset.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, the upper limit of the number of continuous time reduction settings is set to three. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set during the normal gaming state or the first. When the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the jackpot symbol X2 or the small-hit symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state. When this is done, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small-hit symbol Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. Any of these decisions will be counted as the number of consecutive time reduction settings. Then, when these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time reduction settings reaches the upper limit, and therefore, after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol or the small hit symbol described above, the above-mentioned After the lost symbol is determined, the normal game state is forcibly set.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, the upper limit of the number of pachinko machines held is set to 0, and the pachinko machine P does not hold the pachinko machine when the game ball passes through the gate 20. Then, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state set as described above ends at the start of fluctuation based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and then the normal gaming state is set. ing.
Here, for example, when the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state is changed to the second low-probability time-saving game state through the execution of the special game, the second special figure random number is not stored in the hold. 2 Low probability time saving game state may be set. In this case, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, the second start winning opening 16 is opened, and the first game ball enters the opening second starting winning opening 16 and enters the ball. When the fluctuation is started based on the above, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends. However, since the second start winning opening 16 is still open at the start of the fluctuation, a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 during this period, so that the second special figure random number is up to two, which is the upper limit. It will be stored on hold.

Further, as described above, since a big hit or a small hit is always won based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, after the special game based on the winning is completed, the second special figure random number The second low-probability time-saving game state may be set in the state where is held and stored. In this case, as soon as the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, a big hit lottery based on the second special figure random number stored on hold (the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit) is performed and the fluctuation starts. Therefore, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends immediately after the setting of the second low-probability time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20 after the end of the above-mentioned special game, the second low-probability time-saving game state has already ended, so that the second start winning opening 16 is extremely difficult to be maintained in the open state. , The game ball does not enter the second start winning opening 16.

When the jackpot lottery is performed based on the last second special figure random number that has been stored on hold, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again with the second special figure random number not stored on hold. To. In this case, the same processing as described above is performed.

(Gameability of pachinko machine P according to other application example 4)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined) and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state) Either a game state in which the states are combined) or a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state in which the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state are combined) is set, and the game proceeds. There is.

(1) When a jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state (when the number of continuous time-saving settings is 0) When the player starts the game, the normal game state is set. In the normal game state, the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0 (that is, the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 3).
During the normal game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this, the game ball is Since there is a possibility that the ball enters only the first starting winning opening 15, a big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is performed during the game state. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0) as described above, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, so that the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on the above, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is two).
Further, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched according to this. Since the game ball may enter only the second start winning opening 16, a big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is performed during the game state. ..
When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above, the second special figure random number is not stored on hold. Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second start winning opening 16 is opened, and the jackpot based on the entry of the first game ball into the opening second starting winning opening 16. A lottery and fluctuations are performed, and further, based on the entry of the second and third game balls into the second start winning opening 16, up to two second special figure random numbers, which is the upper limit number, are reserved and stored.

Then, in the above-mentioned jackpot lottery, as described above, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the jackpot winning, the jackpot symbol X3 is determined based on the jackpot winning, the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the jackpot winning, or The lottery result of any of the determination of the small hit symbol Y2 based on the winning of the small hit is derived. In the second low-probability time-saving game state, even if any of the above symbols is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the end of the special game based on the determination (FIG. 48, FIG. (Refer to 49), the number of continuous time reduction settings increases by 1 (the remaining number until the maximum number of times is reached decreases by 1). Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the special game is continuously executed until the number of times of continuous time-saving setting reaches the upper limit.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time saving setting times is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Since the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one based on this, if any of the jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small hit symbol Y1 or small hit symbol Y2 is subsequently determined twice, the special game based on the determination ends. After that, the normal game state is forcibly set. Further, since the normal game state is forcibly set, the continuous time reduction setting number is reset to 0 times.

Here, as described above, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, in addition to the second special figure random number used for the first jackpot lottery and fluctuation, two second special figure random numbers are generated. It is stored on hold. Therefore, when the above-mentioned symbol is determined twice and the normal game state is forcibly set, the remaining one second special symbol random number is reserved and stored.
Then, a big hit lottery is performed based on the last one second special symbol random number stored in this hold, and one of the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small hit symbol Y1 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined. To. Here, since the normal gaming state is set at the time of the lottery, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set again (FIG. 48, (See FIG. 49), the number of continuous time reduction settings is one (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is two). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the normal gaming state is set (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

Then, since the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is performed, the second special symbol random number is not stored on hold, so that the second low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1. If it is set, the second start winning opening 16 is opened again, and a big hit lottery and fluctuation based on the entry of the first game ball into the opening second starting winning opening 16 are performed. Further, based on the entry of the second and third game balls into the second start winning opening 16, up to two second special figure random numbers, which is the upper limit number, are stored on hold.
As a result, the special game is continuously executed until any one of the big hit symbol X2, the big hit symbol X3, the small hit symbol Y1 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined twice.

On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined and the normal gaming state is set, the jackpot is won again from the normal gaming state (determination of the jackpot symbol X2), and the first based on the winning. 2 We will aim to shift to a low-probability time-saving game state.

In this way, if the jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state (when the number of continuous time-saving setting times is 0), it remains when the game shifts to the normal game state. Unless the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined based on the last one second special symbol random number, the second low-probability time-saving game state is repeatedly set, and the special game is continuously executed. ..
For example, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined when the game first shifts to the normal game state, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is changed to the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2. Up to the special game based on it, a total of 4 special games will be executed. Further, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined when the first transition to the normal gaming state is determined, and when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined when the transition to the normal gaming state is performed the second time, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined. A total of seven special games will be executed, from a special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to a special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 described above.

(2) When the jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of continuous time-saving setting times is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set (1), the first start in the normal game state If a lost symbol Z1 is determined due to a loss in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the winning opening 15, the gaming state after the determination is set to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (FIG. 48). , See FIG. 49). Then, based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one (the remaining two until the upper limit is reached).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of times of continuous time-saving setting is one), the game ball is continuously launched into the first game area 12a. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving game state. Therefore, based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIGS. 48 and 49), the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two (the remaining one until the upper limit is reached).
Further, as in the case of (1), after setting the second low-probability time-saving game state, the first game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 and the jackpot lottery and fluctuation are based on this. Is performed, and further, based on the entry of the second and third game balls into the second start winning opening 16, the second special figure random numbers are reserved and stored up to the upper limit of two.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time saving setting times is 1) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two, so if any of the jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small hit symbol Y1 or small hit symbol Y2 is determined once, the special game based on that determination ends. After that, the normal game state is forcibly set. Further, since the normal game state is forcibly set, the continuous time reduction setting number is reset to 0 times.

(B) When the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the second special symbol random number stored in advance in the forcibly set normal game state. Here, as described above. When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, two second special figure random numbers are reserved and stored in addition to the second special figure random number used for the first jackpot lottery and fluctuation. Therefore, when the above-mentioned symbol is determined once and the normal game state is forcibly set, the remaining two second special symbol random numbers are reserved and stored.
Then, a big hit lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number that is reserved and stored earlier than the two reserved and stored, and the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small hit symbol Y1 or the small hit symbol is performed. One of Y2 is determined. Here, since the normal game state is set at the time of the lottery, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, the second low probability time reduction is performed again as in the case of (1). The game state is set (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one (the remaining two until the upper limit is reached).
Then, at this point, since the remaining one second special figure random number is reserved and stored, any of the above-mentioned symbols is determined based on the last one second special figure random number, and the second special figure again. 2 The low-probability time-saving game state is set (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the number of continuous time-saving setting times is two (the remaining one until the upper limit is reached).

Then, since the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is performed, the second special figure random number is not stored on hold, so the second low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of any of the above-mentioned symbols. In that case, the second start winning opening 16 is opened again, and a big hit lottery and fluctuation based on the entry of the first game ball into the opening second starting winning opening 16 are performed, and further. , Based on the entry of the second and third game balls into the second start winning opening 16, up to two second special figure random numbers, which is the upper limit number, are stored on hold.
As mentioned above, at this point, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two (the remaining one until the maximum number of times is reached), so the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the first game ball described above When any of the big hit symbol X2, the big hit symbol X3, the small hit symbol Y1 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the normal game state is forcibly set, and the situation is the same as described above.

(B) When the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined based on the second special symbol random number stored in advance in the forcibly set normal game state. The normal game state is forcibly set in, and the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined based on the second special symbol random number that was previously reserved and stored out of the two that were reserved and stored at this time. If so, the normal gaming state is set again based on the determination (see FIGS. 48 and 49).
Then, at this point, since the remaining one second special symbol random number is reserved and stored, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the last one second special symbol random number. The second low-probability time-saving game state is set again (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the situation is the same as in (1) described above.
On the other hand, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the normal gaming state is continuously set (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and in this case as well, the same situation as in (1) above. Will be.

In this way, if the jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is one), it remains when the game shifts to the normal game state. For both of the two second special symbol random numbers, the second low-probability time-saving game state is repeatedly set and the special game is continuously executed unless the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined. Become.
For example, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second special symbol random numbers that were reserved and stored when the first normal game state was entered, A total of four special games will be executed, from a special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to a special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 described above. In addition, the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special symbol random number that was reserved and stored when the first normal game state was entered, and the second normal game state was entered. If the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second special symbol random numbers that were held and stored at the time of this, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. A total of seven special games will be executed up to the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 described above.
In addition, the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special symbol random number that was reserved and stored when the first normal game state was entered, and the second normal game state was entered. The jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special symbol random number that was reserved and stored at the time of the third time, and the one that was reserved and stored when the game transitioned to the normal game state for the third time. When the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined for both the eye and the second second special symbol random number, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is selected from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. A total of 10 special games will be executed up to the special game based on the decision of.

(3) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of continuous time-saving setting times is 2) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. If a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two, the special game based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is not executed. , The normal game state will be set again.
In addition, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 in the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 2), other cases are also observed. Similar to the pachinko machine P according to the application example 3 of the above, after the determination, the normal gaming state is forcibly set (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the above-mentioned (1) to (3) are repeated. Become.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, a specific loss symbol (loss symbol Z1) is performed without winning a big hit and executing a special game. Is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the number of continuous time-saving setting times is updated. In addition, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is changed to the normal game state through a special game, a predetermined jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X2) is obtained based on the remaining second special symbol random numbers stored at that time. ) Or the small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1) is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again. Then, at the time when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set according to the number of times when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, the upper limit of the number of continuous time-saving setting times is set. The remaining number of times until reaching is changed, and the second low-probability time-saving game can be re-shifted to the second low-probability time-saving game state according to the lottery result at the time of the transition to the normal game state. During the state (until the normal game state is set again), the number of times the special game is continuously executed changes, and it is possible to impart a novel game property that enhances the player's interest.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to set the winning of the big hit or the small hit when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, and it may be set so as to be lost with a predetermined determination probability. ..
In addition, whenever a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 and a loss is determined, a specific loss symbol (loss) in which the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) is set is set. The symbol Z1) may be determined.
Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 and the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol in which the normal game state is set may be determined.
In addition, the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) is set based on the determination of a specific loss symbol (loss symbol Z1) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15. Instead of doing so, a specific jackpot symbol or small hit symbol that sets the first time saving game state by entering the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 is provided, and the specific jackpot symbol or small hit symbol is provided. The first time-saving game state may be set based on the determination of.

(Other application example 5)
(Outline of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5 is also a so-called one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as shown in FIG. 50, a normal drawing start port 70 into which a game ball can enter is provided in the lower center of the game area 12. Only the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the general drawing start winning opening 70.

In addition, an approach device 80 through which a game ball can enter is provided at the lower left of the start port 70. As shown in FIG. 50, the approach device 80 enters through an entry port 81 into which a game ball can enter, an opening / closing door 82 (ordinary electric accessory) that opens and closes the entry opening 81, and an entry port 81. The ball entered through the first flow passage 83 and the second flow passage 84 where the ball can flow down, and the ball entry port 81 when the ball can be displaced to the first position or the second position and is in the first position. A game in which a distribution member 85 that distributes a game ball to the first flow-down passage 83 and distributes a game ball that has entered from the entry port 81 to the second flow-down passage 84 when it is in the second position and a game that flows down the first flow-down passage 83. The first gate 86 through which the ball can pass, the second gate 87 through which the game ball flowing down the second flow passage 84 can pass, and the game ball passing through the first gate 86 and the second gate 87 of the game board 11 It is equipped with a discharge port (not shown) that discharges to the back.
Further, as shown in FIG. 50, in the center of the left portion of the game area 12, a first start winning opening 15 having an open / close opening / closing door 90 and a second starting winning opening having an openable opening / closing door 91 are provided. 16 and 16 are installed side by side. Further, in the lower left portion of the game area 12, an attacker device 17 having the same configuration as that of the other application example 3 and the other application example 4 is provided.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, similarly to the other application examples 3 and the other application examples 4, the pachinko machine P is in the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. Either one is set, but in any of the gaming states, the launching (left-handed) of the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a is instructed.
Then, when the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a enters the normal drawing start port 70, a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, and when the result of the lottery is successful, the opening / closing door 82 opens and the entry device 80 enters. The game ball can enter the ball opening 81, and the distribution member 85 stops at the first position or the second position, so that the game ball entered from the entry port 81 can enter the first flow passage 83 or the second. It is led to the flow passage 84. Which flow passage the game ball is guided to is predetermined according to the set game state.

Further, when the game ball guided to the first flow passage 83 passes through the first gate 86, the opening / closing door 90 opens (the second start winning opening 16 is opened), and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. It will be possible. Then, when two game balls enter the second start winning opening 16, the opening / closing door 90 closes. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, the upper limit number of hold of the first special figure random number (the upper limit number of the first hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is It is set to one.
Further, when the game ball guided to the second flow passage 84 passes through the second gate 87, the opening / closing door 91 opens (the first start winning opening 15 is opened), and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. It will be possible. Then, when two game balls enter the second start winning opening 16, the opening / closing door 91 closes. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, the upper limit number of the second special figure random numbers that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 (the upper limit of the second hold number) is It is set to one.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as shown in FIG. 51, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol during the non-time saving game state (during the normal game state) is set to about 1/150. The opening time of the opening / closing door 82 in the case of a hit is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, when a hit is made in the lottery of the normal symbol during the non-time saving game state, the distribution member 85 is stopped at the second position, whereby the game ball entered from the entry port 81 is moved to the second gate 87. The second start winning opening 16 is opened by passing through.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) is set to about 1/2, and the winning is achieved. In this case, the opening time of the opening / closing door 82 is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds × 2 times). Then, when a hit is made in the lottery of the normal symbol during the first time-saving game state, the distribution member 85 is stopped at the first position, whereby the game ball entered from the entrance 81 is the first gate. By passing through 86, the first starting winning opening 15 is opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state) is set to about 1 / 1.1. When this happens, the opening time of the opening / closing door 82 is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, when a hit is made in the lottery of the normal symbol during the second time-shortening game state, the distribution member 85 is stopped at the second position, whereby the game ball entered from the entrance 81 is the second gate. By passing through 87, the second start winning opening 16 is opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, similarly to the other application examples 3 and 4, when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15. It is possible to win a jackpot, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and if it is lost, the lost symbol Z1 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state.
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls can be acquired.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state). After the end of the special game based on the determination, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set.
Further, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the determination. .. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is not set. That is, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues even after the determination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, when a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, a big hit or a small hit can be won, and the big hit can be obtained. If the player wins, the big hit symbol X2 or X3 is determined, if the small hit is won, the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and if the player loses, the lost symbol Z2 is determined.
Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, the jackpot is won (whether the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined), or the small hit is won (small hit symbol Y1 or Y2). The special game is executed through the small hit game executed based on (decision of).

As shown in FIG. 51, the winning probability of the jackpot when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state, and the second start winning is won. The winning probability of a small hit when a game ball enters the mouth 16 is set to about 149/300 regardless of the game state. That is, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit and executing a special game is about 1/2.
Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 at the time of winning the jackpot are both halved. Similarly, the probability of determining the small hit symbol Y1 and the probability of determining the small hit symbol Y2 at the time of winning the small hit are both halved.
Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 400. You can get individual game balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, after the special game based on the determination is completed. When the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set and the game state at the time of the determination is the second low-probability time-saving game state, the normal game state after the end of the special game based on the decision. Is set.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the gaming state at the time of the determination is either the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. Also, after the end of the special game based on the determination, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set. That is, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-savings are set (the second low-probability time-saving game). It will be reset) in the state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, when the lost symbol X2 is determined, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of time reductions is 999 times) is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is not set. That is, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state continues even after the determination.

(Gameability of pachinko machine P according to other application example 5)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined), the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state, and the non-time-saving gaming state) Either the first time-saving game state (game state in which the first time-saving game state is combined) or the second low-probability time-saving game state (game state in which the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state are combined) is set, and the game proceeds. It has become like.

In the initial state immediately after factory shipment or after reset, the normal game state is set.
During the normal game state, the game ball can enter the normal drawing start winning opening 70, and a lottery of the normal symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing starting winning opening 70 is performed. .. If the lottery of the ordinary symbol is successful, as described above, the opening / closing door 82 is opened so that the game ball that has entered the approach device 70 can pass through the second gate 87, and the game ball passes through the gate. The second start winning opening 16 is opened. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second start winning opening 16, the second starting winning opening 16 is closed, and a big hit lottery is drawn based on the entered game ball. It is done once.
In this jackpot lottery, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and after the end of the special game based on the determination, the second low-probability time-saving game state (time reduction number of times 100 times) is set (FIGS. 51 and 52). reference). On the other hand, when the loss occurs, the lost symbol Z1 is determined, and after the determination, the first low-probability time-saving game state (time reduction number of times 999 times) is set (see FIGS. 51 and 52).

(1) When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set Even during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the normal drawing start winning opening 70 as in the normal game state. The opening / closing door 82 is opened and the game ball that has entered the approach device 70 is the second gate when it is won in the lottery of the normal symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the general drawing start winning opening 70. It becomes possible to pass through 87, and when the game ball passes through the gate, the second start winning opening 16 is opened. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second start winning opening 16, the second starting winning opening 16 is closed, and a big hit lottery is performed once based on the entered game ball.

In this jackpot lottery, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, if the jackpot is won, the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and if the jackpot is lost, the lost symbol Z2 is determined (FIGS. 51 and 52). reference). Then, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set again after the end of the special game based on the determination (see FIGS. 51 and 52). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, the normal gaming state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination (see FIGS. 51 and 52). Further, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state continues even after the determination (see FIGS. 51 and 52).

Since the number of time reductions in the second low-probability time-saving game state is set to 100 times, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends when the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is performed 100 times without winning the jackpot. Will be. However, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning opening 16 is frequently opened, and in the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, a big hit or a small hit Since the probability of winning the game is set to about 1/2, the second low-probability time-saving game state continues until the jackpot or the small hit is won again.
Then, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, unless the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined in the above-mentioned jackpot lottery, the second is through a special game based on the winning of the jackpot or the small hit. The low-probability time-saving game state will be set repeatedly.

On the other hand, if the normal game state is set after the end of the special game based on the decision of the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1, the normal symbol will be won in the lottery as described above. 2 A big hit lottery is held based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning opening 16. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state (100 times of time reduction) is set again, and when the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. Is set.

(2) When the first low-probability time-saving game state is set As described above, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined in the normal game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
Even during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the normal drawing start winning opening 70 as in the normal game state and the second low-probability time-saving game state. When a hit is made in a lottery of a normal symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the normal drawing start winning opening 70, the opening / closing door 82 is opened and the game ball entering the approach device 70 can pass through the first gate 86. , The first start winning opening 15 is opened when the game ball passes through the gate. Then, when two game balls enter the opened first start winning opening 15, the first starting winning opening 15 is closed, and a big hit lottery is drawn based on the previously entered game ball. And the fluctuation is performed, and the first special figure random number acquired based on the game ball that has entered later is stored on hold. In addition, when the fluctuation during execution is completed, the jackpot lottery and fluctuation based on the first special figure random number stored on hold are continuously performed.

Then, in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 described above, if the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, after the end of the special game based on the determination, the first 2 A low-probability time-saving game state is set (see FIGS. 51 and 52). The flow of the game after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set is the same as in (1).
On the other hand, in the above-mentioned jackpot lottery, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the time-saving game state is not set and the first low-probability time-saving game state continues as it is. In addition, since the big hit lottery is performed once, the remaining number of time reductions in the first low-probability time-saving game state is reduced by one.

Here, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, two game balls enter while the first start winning opening 15 is opened by the winning decision in the lottery of the normal symbol, so that the first special figure random number is generated. The state in which one is held and stored is maintained. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as described above, the number of time reductions in the first low probability time reduction game state is set to 999 times, which is an odd number of times. Then, if the jackpot lottery is performed 999 times without winning the jackpot during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set (see FIG. 52). ), At this point, one first special figure random number is reserved and stored.
Then, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the first special figure random number that is held and stored at the time when the normal game state is set, and if the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, it is based on the decision. After the end of the special game, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set (see FIGS. 51 and 52). Further, even when the lost symbol Z1 is determined due to a loss in the above-mentioned jackpot lottery, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set after the determination (see FIGS. 51 and 52).
That is, if the jackpot lottery is performed 999 times without winning the jackpot after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the subsequent game state is always the second low-probability time-saving game state that is highly advantageous to the player. It will be set to the game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, when the jackpot lottery is performed a predetermined number of times in a predetermined gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state) without winning the jackpot, the next step is It is advantageous for the player regardless of whether a specific jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X1) is determined or a specific lost symbol (missing symbol Z1) is determined in the executed jackpot lottery. A specific gaming state with a high degree (second low-probability time-saving gaming state) is set. As a result, it is possible to set an upper limit (so-called ceiling) for the number of jackpot lottery until the player shifts to a specific gaming state, and it is possible to impart a novel game property that enhances the interest of the player.
It should be noted that if a loss occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16, the loss symbol is defined to set the first low-probability time-saving game state (time reduction number of times: 999 times). Although only Z2 was to be determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lost symbol Z1 in which the second low-probability time-saving game state (time reduction number of times 100 times) is set is defined. It may be possible to determine.

In addition, various settings and controls of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and other application examples may be configured in combination with each other within a range that does not cause a contradiction.
In addition, the special game in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the advantageous game of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step 807 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the determination means of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the processes of step 806 and step 808 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the symbol determining means of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the processes of step 1115, step 1281, step 1305, and step 1308 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the setting means of the present invention. Further, the lost symbol Z1 and the like in the other application examples 1 to 5 correspond to the specific symbol of the present invention. Further, the jackpot symbol X1 in the other application example 5 corresponds to a predetermined symbol of the present invention. Further, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state in the other application example 5 corresponds to the time-saving gaming state common to the present invention. Further, the pachinko machine P in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the gaming machine of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
300 Sub control board 301 Sub CPU
302 sub ROM
303 sub RAM

Claims (1)

A decidable means that can determine whether or not to execute an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
A symbol determining means capable of determining a symbol associated with the result of the determination,
A setting means capable of setting any one of a non-time-saving game state in which the frequency of determining whether or not to execute the advantageous game is relatively low, and a plurality of game states including the time-saving game state in which the frequency is relatively high, and With
The setting means can set the time-saving game state when a specific symbol associated with not executing the advantageous game is determined, and when the specific symbol is determined and the advantage. A gaming machine characterized in that a common time-saving gaming state can be set in any case where a predetermined symbol associated with executing a game is determined.

Images